Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W

EPGA11DAV3(7)
EPGA14DAV3(7)
EPGA16DAV3(7)

EABH16DF6V
EABH16DF9W

EABX16DF6V
EABX16DF9W
Table of contents

Table of contents
1 About this document 6
1.1 Meaning of warnings and symbols................................................................................................................................. 7
1.2 Installer reference guide at a glance .............................................................................................................................. 8

2 General safety precautions 10

2.1 For the installer ............................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1.2 Installation site ............................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.3 Refrigerant — in case of R410A or R32.......................................................................................................... 11
2.1.4 Water .............................................................................................................................................................. 13
2.1.5 Electrical ......................................................................................................................................................... 13

3 Specific installer safety instructions 16

4 About the box 21
4.1 Overview: About the box ................................................................................................................................................ 21
4.2 Outdoor unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.2.1 To unpack the outdoor unit ........................................................................................................................... 21
4.2.2 To handle the outdoor unit ............................................................................................................................ 22
4.2.3 To remove the accessories from the outdoor unit........................................................................................ 22
4.2.4 To remove the transportation stay ................................................................................................................ 23
4.3 Indoor unit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 24
4.3.1 To unpack the indoor unit.............................................................................................................................. 24
4.3.2 To remove the accessories from the indoor unit .......................................................................................... 24

5 About the units and options 26

5.1 Overview: About the units and options.......................................................................................................................... 26
5.2 Identification ................................................................................................................................................................... 26
5.2.1 Identification label: Outdoor unit .................................................................................................................. 26
5.2.2 Identification label: Indoor unit ..................................................................................................................... 26
5.3 Combining units and options.......................................................................................................................................... 27
5.3.1 Possible options for the outdoor unit ............................................................................................................ 27
5.3.2 Possible options for the indoor unit............................................................................................................... 27
5.3.3 Possible combinations of indoor unit and outdoor unit................................................................................ 29
5.3.4 Possible combinations of indoor unit and domestic hot water tank ............................................................ 29

6 Application guidelines 30
6.1 Overview: Application guidelines ................................................................................................................................... 30
6.2 Setting up the space heating/cooling system ................................................................................................................ 30
6.2.1 Single room..................................................................................................................................................... 31
6.2.2 Multiple rooms – One LWT zone ................................................................................................................... 35
6.2.3 Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones.................................................................................................................. 39
6.3 Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating ................................................................................................... 41
6.4 Setting up the domestic hot water tank......................................................................................................................... 44
6.4.1 System layout – Integrated DHW tank........................................................................................................... 44
6.4.2 System layout – Standalone DHW tank ......................................................................................................... 44
6.4.3 Selecting the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank .............................................................. 45
6.4.4 Setup and configuration – DHW tank ............................................................................................................ 46
6.4.5 DHW pump for instant hot water .................................................................................................................. 47
6.4.6 DHW pump for disinfection ........................................................................................................................... 47
6.4.7 DHW pump for tank preheating..................................................................................................................... 48
6.5 Setting up the energy metering...................................................................................................................................... 48
6.5.1 Produced heat ................................................................................................................................................ 49
6.5.2 Consumed energy........................................................................................................................................... 49
6.5.3 Normal kWh rate power supply ..................................................................................................................... 50
6.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply.............................................................................................................. 51
6.6 Setting up the power consumption control ................................................................................................................... 52
6.6.1 Permanent power limitation .......................................................................................................................... 53
6.6.2 Power limitation activated by digital inputs .................................................................................................. 53
6.6.3 Power limitation process................................................................................................................................ 55
6.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor ................................................................................................................... 56

7 Unit installation 57
7.1 Preparing the installation site......................................................................................................................................... 57
7.1.1 Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit........................................................................................ 57
7.1.2 Additional installation site requirements of the outdoor unit in cold climates............................................ 60

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
2 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 Table of contents
7.1.3 Installation site requirements of the indoor unit .......................................................................................... 60
7.2 Opening and closing the units ........................................................................................................................................ 61
7.2.1 About opening the units................................................................................................................................. 61
7.2.2 To open the outdoor unit............................................................................................................................... 62
7.2.3 To remove the transportation stay ................................................................................................................ 62
7.2.4 To close the outdoor unit............................................................................................................................... 63
7.2.5 To open the indoor unit ................................................................................................................................. 63
7.2.6 To close the indoor unit ................................................................................................................................. 65
7.3 Mounting the outdoor unit............................................................................................................................................. 65
7.3.1 About mounting the outdoor unit ................................................................................................................. 65
7.3.2 Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit .............................................................................................. 66
7.3.3 To provide the installation structure ............................................................................................................. 66
7.3.4 To install the outdoor unit ............................................................................................................................. 66
7.3.5 To provide drainage........................................................................................................................................ 67
7.4 Mounting the indoor unit ............................................................................................................................................... 68
7.4.1 About mounting the indoor unit.................................................................................................................... 68
7.4.2 Precautions when mounting the indoor unit................................................................................................. 68
7.4.3 To install the indoor unit ................................................................................................................................ 68
7.4.4 To connect the drain hose to the drain ......................................................................................................... 69

8 Piping installation 70
8.1 Preparing water piping ................................................................................................................................................... 70
8.1.1 Water circuit requirements............................................................................................................................ 70
8.1.2 Formula to calculate the expansion vessel pre-pressure .............................................................................. 73
8.1.3 To check the water volume and flow rate ..................................................................................................... 73
8.1.4 Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel...................................................................................... 76
8.1.5 To check the water volume: Examples .......................................................................................................... 76
8.2 Connecting water piping................................................................................................................................................. 77
8.2.1 About connecting the water piping ............................................................................................................... 77
8.2.2 Precautions when connecting the water piping............................................................................................ 77
8.2.3 To connect the water piping .......................................................................................................................... 77
8.2.4 To fill the water circuit ................................................................................................................................... 79
8.2.5 To protect the water circuit against freezing ................................................................................................ 80
8.2.6 To fill the domestic hot water tank................................................................................................................ 83
8.2.7 To insulate the water piping .......................................................................................................................... 83

9 Electrical installation 84
9.1 About connecting the electrical wiring .......................................................................................................................... 84
9.1.1 Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring....................................................................................... 84
9.1.2 Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring......................................................................................... 85
9.1.3 About electrical compliance........................................................................................................................... 86
9.1.4 About preferential kWh rate power supply................................................................................................... 86
9.1.5 Overview of electrical connections except external actuators ..................................................................... 87
9.2 Connections to the outdoor unit.................................................................................................................................... 87
9.2.1 To connect the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit .................................................................................... 87
9.3 Connections to the indoor unit ...................................................................................................................................... 89
9.3.1 To connect the main power supply................................................................................................................ 89
9.3.2 To connect the backup heater power supply ................................................................................................ 90
9.3.3 To connect the shut-off valve ........................................................................................................................ 92
9.3.4 To connect the electricity meters .................................................................................................................. 93
9.3.5 To connect the domestic hot water pump .................................................................................................... 93
9.3.6 To connect the alarm output ......................................................................................................................... 94
9.3.7 To connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output................................................................................. 94
9.3.8 To connect the changeover to external heat source..................................................................................... 95
9.3.9 To connect the power consumption digital inputs........................................................................................ 95
9.3.10 To connect the safety thermostat (normally closed contact) ....................................................................... 96
9.3.11 To connect a Smart Grid................................................................................................................................. 96

10 Configuration 99
10.1 Overview: Configuration................................................................................................................................................. 99
10.1.1 To access the most used commands ............................................................................................................. 100
10.2 Configuration wizard....................................................................................................................................................... 102
10.3 Possible screens .............................................................................................................................................................. 103
10.3.1 Possible screens: Overview ............................................................................................................................ 103
10.3.2 Home screen................................................................................................................................................... 104
10.3.3 Main menu screen.......................................................................................................................................... 106
10.3.4 Menu screen................................................................................................................................................... 107
10.3.5 Setpoint screen............................................................................................................................................... 107
10.3.6 Detailed screen with values ........................................................................................................................... 108
10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example.............................................................................................................................. 108

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 3
Table of contents
10.4 Weather-dependent curve ............................................................................................................................................. 113
10.4.1 What is a weather-dependent curve? ........................................................................................................... 113
10.4.2 2-points curve................................................................................................................................................. 113
10.4.3 Slope-offset curve........................................................................................................................................... 114
10.4.4 Using weather-dependent curves.................................................................................................................. 116
10.5 Settings menu ................................................................................................................................................................. 118
10.5.1 Malfunctioning ............................................................................................................................................... 118
10.5.2 Room............................................................................................................................................................... 118
10.5.3 Main zone ....................................................................................................................................................... 121
10.5.4 Additional zone............................................................................................................................................... 130
10.5.5 Space heating/cooling .................................................................................................................................... 134
10.5.6 Tank................................................................................................................................................................. 142
10.5.7 User settings ................................................................................................................................................... 143
10.5.8 Information..................................................................................................................................................... 147
10.5.9 Installer settings ............................................................................................................................................. 148
10.5.10 Commissioning ............................................................................................................................................... 166
10.5.11 User profile ..................................................................................................................................................... 166
10.5.12 Operation........................................................................................................................................................ 166
10.6 Menu structure: Overview user settings........................................................................................................................ 167
10.7 Menu structure: Overview installer settings.................................................................................................................. 168

11 Commissioning 169
11.1 Overview: Commissioning .............................................................................................................................................. 169
11.2 Precautions when commissioning .................................................................................................................................. 169
11.3 Checklist before commissioning..................................................................................................................................... 170
11.4 Checklist during commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 171
11.4.1 To check the minimum flow rate ................................................................................................................... 171
11.4.2 Air purge function........................................................................................................................................... 171
11.4.3 To perform an operation test run .................................................................................................................. 173
11.4.4 To perform an actuator test run .................................................................................................................... 173
11.4.5 Possible actuator test runs............................................................................................................................. 174
11.4.6 Underfloor heating screed dryout ................................................................................................................. 174

12 Hand-over to the user 178

13 Maintenance and service 179
13.1 Overview: Maintenance and service .............................................................................................................................. 179
13.2 Maintenance safety precautions.................................................................................................................................... 179
13.3 Checklist for yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit................................................................................................... 179
13.4 Checklist for yearly maintenance of the indoor unit ..................................................................................................... 179
13.5 About cleaning the water filter in case of trouble ......................................................................................................... 182
13.5.1 To remove the water filter ............................................................................................................................. 182
13.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble.................................................................................................... 182
13.5.3 To install the water filter ................................................................................................................................ 184

14 Troubleshooting 185
14.1 Overview: Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................ 185
14.2 Precautions when troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 185
14.3 Solving problems based on symptoms........................................................................................................................... 186
14.3.1 Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or cooling as expected........................................................................... 186
14.3.2 Symptom: Hot water does NOT reach the desired temperature.................................................................. 186
14.3.3 Symptom: The compressor does NOT start (space heating or domestic water heating) ............................ 187
14.3.4 Symptom: The system is making gurgling noises after commissioning ........................................................ 187
14.3.5 Symptom: The pump is making noise (cavitation)......................................................................................... 188
14.3.6 Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens.................................................................................................... 188
14.3.7 Symptom: The water pressure relief valve leaks........................................................................................... 189
14.3.8 Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently heated at low outdoor temperatures........................................... 189
14.3.9 Symptom: The pressure at the tapping point is temporarily unusually high................................................ 190
14.3.10 Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed away due to a swollen tank ........................................................ 190
14.3.11 Symptom: Tank disinfection function is NOT completed correctly (AH-error)............................................. 190
14.4 Solving problems based on error codes ......................................................................................................................... 191
14.4.1 To display the help text in case of a malfunction .......................................................................................... 191
14.4.2 Error codes: Overview .................................................................................................................................... 192

15 Disposal 198
15.1 To recover refrigerant..................................................................................................................................................... 198
15.1.1 To open the stop valves ................................................................................................................................. 199
15.1.2 To manually open the electronic expansion valves....................................................................................... 199
15.1.3 Recovery mode............................................................................................................................................... 200

16 Technical data 202

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 Table of contents
16.1 Service space: Outdoor unit ........................................................................................................................................... 202
16.2 Piping diagram: Outdoor unit ......................................................................................................................................... 203
16.3 Piping diagram: Indoor unit ............................................................................................................................................ 204
16.4 Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit ........................................................................................................................................ 205
16.5 Wiring diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................................................................................................... 208
16.6 ESP curve: Indoor unit..................................................................................................................................................... 214

17 Glossary 215
18 Field settings table 216

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 5
1 | About this document

1 About this document

Target audience
Authorised installers
Documentation set
This document is part of a documentation set. The complete set consists of:
▪ General safety precautions:
- Safety instructions that you must read before installing
- Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Operation manual:
- Quick guide for basic usage
- Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ User reference guide:
- Detailed step-by-step instructions and background information for basic and
advanced usage
- Format: Digital files on http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/
product-information/
▪ Installation manual – Outdoor unit:
- Installation instructions
- Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
▪ Installation manual – Indoor unit:
- Installation instructions
- Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Installer reference guide:
- Preparation of the installation, good practices, reference data, …
- Format: Digital files on http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/
product-information/
▪ Addendum book for optional equipment:
- Additional info about how to install optional equipment
- Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit) + Digital files on http://
www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/product-information/
Latest revisions of the supplied documentation may be available on the regional
Daikin website or via your dealer.
The original documentation is written in English. All other languages are
translations.
Technical engineering data
▪ A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional Daikin website
(publicly accessible).
▪ The full set of latest technical data is available on the Daikin Business Portal
(authentication required).
Online tools
In addition to the documentation set, some online tools are available for installers:

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
6 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 1 | About this document
▪ Heating Solutions Navigator
- Digital toolbox that offers a variety of tools to facilitate the installation and
configuration of heating systems.
- To access Heating Solutions Navigator, registration to the Stand By Me
platform is required. For more information, see https://
professional.standbyme.daikin.eu.
▪ Daikin e-Care
- Mobile app for installers and service technicians that allows you to register,
configure and troubleshoot heating systems.
- The mobile app can be downloaded for iOS and Android devices using the QR
codes below. Registration to the Stand By Me platform is required to access
the app.
App Store Google Play

1.1 Meaning of warnings and symbols

DANGER
Indicates a situation that results in death or serious injury.

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

Indicates a situation that could result in electrocution.

DANGER: RISK OF BURNING/SCALDING

Indicates a situation that could result in burning/scalding because of extreme hot or
cold temperatures.

DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION

Indicates a situation that could result in explosion.

WARNING
Indicates a situation that could result in death or serious injury.

WARNING: FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

CAUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property damage.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 7
1 | About this document

INFORMATION
Indicates useful tips or additional information.

Symbols used on the unit:

Symbol Explanation
Before installation, read the installation and operation
manual, and the wiring instruction sheet.
Before performing maintenance and service tasks, read the
service manual.
For more information, see the installer and user reference
guide.
The unit contains rotating parts. Be careful when servicing or
inspecting the unit.

Symbols used in the documentation:

Symbol Explanation
Indicates a figure title or a reference to it.
Example: " 1–3 Figure title" means "Figure 3 in chapter 1".
Indicates a table title or a reference to it.
Example: " 1–3 Table title" means "Table 3 in chapter 1".

1.2 Installer reference guide at a glance

Chapter Description
General safety precautions Safety instructions that you must read before
installing
About the documentation What documentation exists for the installer
About the box How to unpack the units and remove their
accessories
About the units and options ▪ How to identify the units
▪ Possible combinations of units and options
Application guidelines Various installation setups of the system
Preparation What to do and know before going on‑site
Installation What to do and know to install the system
Configuration What to do and know to configure the system
after it is installed
Commissioning What to do and know to commission the system
after it is configured
Hand‑over to the user What to give and explain to the user
Maintenance and service How to maintain and service the units
Troubleshooting What to do in case of problems
Disposal How to dispose of the system

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
8 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 1 | About this document
Chapter Description
Technical data Specifications of the system
Glossary Definition of terms
Field settings table Table to be filled in by the installer, and kept for
future reference
Note: There is also an installer settings table in
the user reference guide. This table has to be
filled in by the installer and handed over to the
user.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 9
2 | General safety precautions

2 General safety precautions

In this chapter
2.1 For the installer....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1.2 Installation site ....................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.3 Refrigerant — in case of R410A or R32 ................................................................................................................. 11
2.1.4 Water...................................................................................................................................................................... 13
2.1.5 Electrical ................................................................................................................................................................. 13

2.1 For the installer

2.1.1 General
If you are NOT sure how to install or operate the unit, contact your dealer.

DANGER: RISK OF BURNING/SCALDING

▪ Do NOT touch the refrigerant piping, water piping or internal parts during and
immediately after operation. It could be too hot or too cold. Give it time to return
to normal temperature. If you MUST touch it, wear protective gloves.
▪ Do NOT touch any accidental leaking refrigerant.

WARNING
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or accessories could result in
electrical shock, short-circuit, leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. ONLY
use accessories, optional equipment and spare parts made or approved by Daikin.

WARNING
Make sure installation, testing and applied materials comply with applicable
legislation (on top of the instructions described in the Daikin documentation).

CAUTION
Wear adequate personal protective equipment (protective gloves, safety glasses,…)
when installing, maintaining or servicing the system.

WARNING
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that nobody, especially
children, can play with them. Possible risk: suffocation.

WARNING
Provide adequate measures to prevent that the unit can be used as a shelter by small
animals. Small animals that make contact with electrical parts can cause
malfunctions, smoke or fire.

CAUTION
Do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium fins of the unit.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
10 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 2 | General safety precautions

CAUTION
▪ Do NOT place any objects or equipment on top of the unit.
▪ Do NOT sit, climb or stand on the unit.

In accordance with the applicable legislation, it might be necessary to provide a

logbook with the product containing at least: information on maintenance, repair
work, results of tests, stand-by periods,…
Also, at least, following information MUST be provided at an accessible place at the
product:
▪ Instructions for shutting down the system in case of an emergency
▪ Name and address of fire department, police and hospital
▪ Name, address and day and night telephone numbers for obtaining service
In Europe, EN378 provides the necessary guidance for this logbook.

2.1.2 Installation site

▪ Provide sufficient space around the unit for servicing and air circulation.
▪ Make sure the installation site withstands the weight and vibration of the unit.
▪ Make sure the area is well ventilated. Do NOT block any ventilation openings.
▪ Make sure the unit is level.
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ In potentially explosive atmospheres.
▪ In places where there is machinery that emits electromagnetic waves.
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the control system, and cause malfunction of
the equipment.
▪ In places where there is a risk of fire due to the leakage of flammable gases
(example: thinner or gasoline), carbon fibre, ignitable dust.
▪ In places where corrosive gas (example: sulphurous acid gas) is produced.
Corrosion of copper pipes or soldered parts may cause the refrigerant to leak.

2.1.3 Refrigerant — in case of R410A or R32

If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide of your
application for more information.

NOTICE
Make sure refrigerant piping installation complies with applicable legislation. In
Europe, EN378 is the applicable standard.

NOTICE
Make sure the field piping and connections are NOT subjected to stress.

WARNING
During tests, NEVER pressurise the product with a pressure higher than the
maximum allowable pressure (as indicated on the nameplate of the unit).

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 11
2 | General safety precautions

WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of refrigerant leakage. If refrigerant gas leaks,
ventilate the area immediately. Possible risks:
▪ Excessive refrigerant concentrations in a closed room can lead to oxygen
deficiency.
▪ Toxic gas might be produced if refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire.

DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION

Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump down the system, and there
is a leak in the refrigerant circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function, with which you can collect
all refrigerant from the system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence: Self-
combustion and explosion of the compressor because of air going into the
operating compressor.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's compressor does NOT have to
operate.

WARNING
ALWAYS recover the refrigerant. Do NOT release them directly into the environment.
Use a vacuum pump to evacuate the installation.

NOTICE
After all the piping has been connected, make sure there is no gas leak. Use nitrogen
to perform a gas leak detection.

NOTICE
▪ To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more than the specified amount
of refrigerant.
▪ When the refrigerant system is to be opened, refrigerant MUST be treated
according to the applicable legislation.

WARNING
Make sure there is no oxygen in the system. Refrigerant may ONLY be charged after
performing the leak test and the vacuum drying.
Possible consequence: Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor because of
oxygen going into the operating compressor.

▪ In case recharge is required, see the nameplate of the unit. It states the type of
refrigerant and necessary amount.
▪ The unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe sizes and pipe
lengths some systems require additional charging of refrigerant.
▪ ONLY use tools exclusively for the refrigerant type used in the system, this to
ensure pressure resistance and prevent foreign materials from entering into the
system.
▪ Charge the liquid refrigerant as follows:

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
12 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 2 | General safety precautions
If Then
A siphon tube is present Charge with the cylinder upright.
(i.e., the cylinder is marked with "Liquid
filling siphon attached")

A siphon tube is NOT present Charge with the cylinder upside down.

▪ Open refrigerant cylinders slowly.

▪ Charge the refrigerant in liquid form. Adding it in gas form may prevent normal
operation.

CAUTION
When the refrigerant charging procedure is done or when pausing, close the valve of
the refrigerant tank immediately. If the valve is NOT closed immediately, remaining
pressure might charge additional refrigerant. Possible consequence: Incorrect
refrigerant amount.

2.1.4 Water
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide of your
application for more information.

NOTICE
Make sure water quality complies with EU directive 2020/2184.

2.1.5 Electrical

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

▪ Turn OFF all power supply before removing the switch box cover, connecting
electrical wiring or touching electrical parts.
▪ Disconnect the power supply for more than 10 minutes, and measure the voltage
at the terminals of main circuit capacitors or electrical components before
servicing. The voltage MUST be less than 50 V DC before you can touch electrical
components. For the location of the terminals, see the wiring diagram.
▪ Do NOT touch electrical components with wet hands.
▪ Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover is removed.

WARNING
If NOT factory installed, a main switch or other means for disconnection, having a
contact separation in all poles providing full disconnection under overvoltage
category III condition, MUST be installed in the fixed wiring.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 13
2 | General safety precautions

WARNING
▪ ONLY use copper wires.
▪ Make sure the field wiring complies with the applicable legislation.
▪ All field wiring MUST be performed in accordance with the wiring diagram
supplied with the product.
▪ NEVER squeeze bundled cables and make sure they do NOT come in contact with
the piping and sharp edges. Make sure no external pressure is applied to the
terminal connections.
▪ Make sure to install earth wiring. Do NOT earth the unit to a utility pipe, surge
absorber, or telephone earth. Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock.
▪ Make sure to use a dedicated power circuit. NEVER use a power supply shared by
another appliance.
▪ Make sure to install the required fuses or circuit breakers.
▪ Make sure to install an earth leakage protector. Failure to do so may cause
electrical shock or fire.
▪ When installing the earth leakage protector, make sure it is compatible with the
inverter (resistant to high frequency electric noise) to avoid unnecessary opening
of the earth leakage protector.

CAUTION
▪ When connecting the power supply: connect the earth cable first, before making
the current-carrying connections.
▪ When disconnecting the power supply: disconnect the current-carrying cables
first, before separating the earth connection.
▪ The length of the conductors between the power supply stress relief and the
terminal block itself MUST be as such that the current-carrying wires are
tautened before the earth wire is in case the power supply is pulled loose from
the stress relief.

NOTICE
Precautions when laying power wiring:

▪ Do NOT connect wiring of different thicknesses to the power terminal block (slack
in the power wiring may cause abnormal heat).
▪ When connecting wiring which is the same thickness, do as shown in the figure
above.
▪ For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect firmly, then secure to
prevent outside pressure being exerted on the terminal board.
▪ Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. A screwdriver
with a small head will damage the head and make proper tightening impossible.
▪ Over-tightening the terminal screws may break them.

Install power cables at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios to prevent
interference. Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may NOT be
sufficient.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
14 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 2 | General safety precautions

WARNING
▪ After finishing the electrical work, confirm that each electrical component and
terminal inside the electrical components box is connected securely.
▪ Make sure all covers are closed before starting up the unit.

NOTICE
ONLY applicable if the power supply is three‑phase, and the compressor has an ON/
OFF starting method.
If there exists the possibility of reversed phase after a momentary black out and the
power goes ON and OFF while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally. Running the product in reversed phase can break the
compressor and other parts.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 15
3 | Specific installer safety instructions

3 Specific installer safety instructions

Always observe the following safety instructions and regulations.
Handling the unit (see "4.2.2 To handle the outdoor unit" [422])

CAUTION
To avoid injury, do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium fins of the unit.

Application guidelines (see "6 Application guidelines" [430])

CAUTION
If there is more than one leaving water zone, ALWAYS install a mixing valve station in
the main zone to decrease (in heating)/increase (in cooling) the leaving water
temperature when the additional zone has demand.

Installation site (see "7.1 Preparing the installation site" [457])

WARNING
Follow the service space dimensions in this manual for correct installation of the unit.
See "16.1 Service space: Outdoor unit" 4
[ 202].

Special requirements for R32 (see "7.1.1 Installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit" [457])

WARNING
▪ Do NOT pierce or burn refrigerant cycle parts.
▪ Do NOT use means to accelerate the defrosting process or to clean the
equipment, other than those recommended by the manufacturer.
▪ Be aware that R32 refrigerant does NOT contain an odour.

WARNING
The appliance shall be stored in a room without continuously operating ignition
sources (example: open flames, an operating gas appliance or an operating electric
heater).

WARNING
Make sure installation, servicing, maintenance and repair comply with instructions
from Daikin and with applicable legislation and are executed ONLY by authorised
persons.

Mounting the outdoor unit (see "7.3 Mounting the outdoor unit" [465])

WARNING
Fixing method of the outdoor unit MUST be in accordance with the instructions from
this manual. See "7.3 Mounting the outdoor unit" 4
[ 65].

Mounting the indoor unit (see "7.4 Mounting the indoor unit" [468])

WARNING
Fixing method of the indoor unit MUST be in accordance with the instructions from
this manual. See "7.4 Mounting the indoor unit" 4
[ 68].

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
16 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 3 | Specific installer safety instructions
Opening and closing the units (see "7.2 Opening and closing the units" [461])

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover is removed.

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

DANGER: RISK OF BURNING/SCALDING

Piping installation (see "8 Piping installation" [470])

WARNING
Field piping method MUST be in accordance with the instructions from this manual.
See "8 Piping installation" 4
[ 70].

WARNING
Install the tundish away from any electrical device. Possible consequence: Electrical
shock or fire.

In case of freeze protection by glycol:

WARNING
Due to the presence of glycol, corrosion of the system is possible. Uninhibited glycol
will turn acidic under the influence of oxygen. This process is accelerated by the
presence of copper and high temperatures. The acidic uninhibited glycol attacks
metal surfaces and forms galvanic corrosion cells that cause severe damage to the
system. Therefore it is important that:
▪ the water treatment is correctly executed by a qualified water specialist,
▪ a glycol with corrosion inhibitors is selected to counteract acids formed by the
oxidation of glycols,
▪ no automotive glycol is used because their corrosion inhibitors have a limited
lifetime and contain silicates which can foul or plug the system,
▪ galvanized pipes are NOT used in glycol systems since the presence may lead to
the precipitation of certain components in the glycol's corrosion inhibitor.

WARNING
Ethylene glycol is toxic.

Electrical installation (see "9 Electrical installation" [484])

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 17
3 | Specific installer safety instructions

WARNING
Electrical wiring connection method MUST be in accordance with the instructions
from:
▪ This manual. See "9 Electrical installation" 4
[ 84].
▪ The wiring diagram, which is delivered with the unit, located at the inside of the
service cover. For a translation of its legend, see "16.4 Wiring diagram: Outdoor
unit" 4
[ 205].

WARNING
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.

WARNING
▪ All wiring MUST be performed by an authorised electrician and MUST comply
with the applicable legislation.
▪ Make electrical connections to the fixed wiring.
▪ All components procured on-site and all electrical construction MUST comply
with the applicable legislation.

WARNING
▪ If the power supply has a missing or wrong N-phase, equipment might break
down.
▪ Establish proper earthing. Do NOT earth the unit to a utility pipe, surge absorber,
or telephone earth. Incomplete earthing may cause electrical shock.
▪ Install the required fuses or circuit breakers.
▪ Secure the electrical wiring with cable ties so that the cables do NOT come in
contact with sharp edges or piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
▪ Do NOT use taped wires, stranded conductor wires, extension cords, or
connections from a star system. They can cause overheating, electrical shock or
fire.
▪ Do NOT install a phase advancing capacitor, because this unit is equipped with an
inverter. A phase advancing capacitor will reduce performance and may cause
accidents.

WARNING
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply and MUST be protected by
the safety devices required by the applicable legislation.

WARNING
If the supply cord is damaged, it MUST be replaced by the manufacturer, its service
agent or similarly qualified persons in order to avoid a hazard.

CAUTION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.

CAUTION
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, ALWAYS connect the backup heater
power supply and the earth cable.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
18 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 3 | Specific installer safety instructions

INFORMATION
Details of type and rating of fuses, or rating of circuit breakers are described in
"9 Electrical installation" 4
[ 84].

Configuration (see "10 Configuration" [499])

WARNING
Be aware that the domestic hot water temperature at the hot water tap will be equal
to the value selected in field setting [2-03] after a disinfection operation.
When the high domestic hot water temperature can be a potential risk for human
injuries, a mixing valve (field supply) shall be installed at the hot water outlet
connection of the domestic hot water tank. This mixing valve shall secure that the
hot water temperature at the hot water tap never rise above a set maximum value.
This maximum allowable hot water temperature shall be selected according to the
applicable legislation.

CAUTION
The disinfection function settings MUST be configured by the installer according to
the applicable legislation.

CAUTION
Make sure that the disinfection function start time [5.7.3] with defined duration
[5.7.5] is NOT interrupted by possible domestic hot water demand.

Commissioning (see "11 Commissioning" [4169])

WARNING
Commissioning method MUST be in accordance with the instructions from this
manual. See "11 Commissioning" 4
[ 169].

Maintenance and service (see Maintenance and service)

WARNING
If the internal wiring is damaged, it has to be replaced by the manufacturer, its
service agent or similarly qualified persons.

CAUTION
Water coming out of the valve may be very hot.

NOTICE
Although the water circuit is drained, some water may be spilled when removing the
magnetic filter/dirt separator from the filter housing. ALWAYS clean up spilled water.

NOTICE
To protect the piping connected to the magnetic filter/dirt separator from damage it
is recommended to perform this procedure with the magnetic filter/dirt separator
removed from the unit.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 19
3 | Specific installer safety instructions

NOTICE
Opening the magnetic filter/dirt separator is ONLY required in case of severe issues.
Preferably this action is never to be done during the complete lifetime of the
magnetic filter/dirt separator.

NOTICE
Check the condition of the O-rings and replace if needed. Apply water to the O-rings
before installation.

CAUTION
Make sure to open the valve (if equipped) towards the expansion vessel, otherwise
the overpressure will be generated.

Troubleshooting (see "14 Troubleshooting" [4185])

DANGER: RISK OF BURNING/SCALDING

WARNING
▪ When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of the unit, ALWAYS make
sure that the unit is disconnected from the mains. Turn off the respective circuit
breaker.
▪ When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and find out why the safety
device was activated before resetting it. NEVER shunt safety devices or change
their values to a value other than the factory default setting. If you are unable to
find the cause of the problem, call your dealer.

WARNING
Prevent hazards due to inadvertent resetting of the thermal cut-out: power to this
appliance MUST NOT be supplied through an external switching device, such as a
timer, or connected to a circuit that is regularly turned ON and OFF by the utility.

WARNING
Air purging heat emitters or collectors. Before you purge air from heat emitters or
collectors, check if or is displayed on the home screen of the user interface.
▪ If not, you can purge air immediately.
▪ If yes, make sure that the room where you want to purge air is sufficiently
ventilated. Reason: Refrigerant might leak into the water circuit, and
subsequently into the room when you purge air from the heat emitters or
collectors.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
20 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 4 | About the box

4 About the box

4.1 Overview: About the box
This chapter describes what you have to do after the boxes with the outdoor and
indoor unit are delivered on-site.
Keep the following in mind:
▪ At delivery, the unit MUST be checked for damage. Any damage MUST be
reported immediately to the claims agent of the carrier.
▪ Bring the packed unit as close as possible to its final installation position to
prevent damage during transport.
▪ Prepare the path along which you want to bring the unit inside in advance.

4.2 Outdoor unit

4.2.1 To unpack the outdoor unit

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 21
4 | About the box

4× 3

4.2.2 To handle the outdoor unit

CAUTION
To avoid injury, do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium fins of the unit.

143 kg

4.2.3 To remove the accessories from the outdoor unit

1 Open the outdoor unit.
2 Remove the accessories.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
22 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 4 | About the box

1×

2×

2×

a b c d e
1× 1× 1× 1× 1×

RXXX ENERG Y IJA

IE IA
ENERG Y IJA
IE IA

a Outdoor unit installation manual

b Fluorinated greenhouse gases label
c Multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label
d Shut-off valve (with integrated filter)
e Energy label

4.2.4 To remove the transportation stay

NOTICE
If the unit is operated with the transportation stay attached, abnormal vibration or
noise may be generated.

The compressor transportation stay must be removed. It is installed under the

compressor leg in order to protect the unit during transport. Proceed as shown in
the figure and procedure below.
1 Remove the nut (a) of the compressor mounting bolt.
2 Remove and discard the transportation stay (b).
3 Re-install the nut (a) of the compressor mounting bolt and tighten to
10.1 N•m of torque.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 23
4 | About the box

3
(10.1 N·m)
1
a
2
b

4.3 Indoor unit

4.3.1 To unpack the indoor unit

1 2

4.3.2 To remove the accessories from the indoor unit

Some accessories are located inside the unit. To open the unit, see "7.2.5 To open
the indoor unit" [463].

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
24 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 4 | About the box
a b c d
1× 1× 1× 1×

e f g
4× 2× 1×

h
1×

a General safety precautions

b Addendum book for optional equipment
c Indoor unit installation manual
d Operation manual
e Sealing ring for shut-off valve
f Shut-off valve
g Overpressure bypass valve
h Wall bracket

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 25
5 | About the units and options

5 About the units and options

5.1 Overview: About the units and options
This chapter contains information about:
▪ Identifying the outdoor unit
▪ Identifying the indoor unit
▪ Combining the outdoor unit with options
▪ Combining the indoor unit with options

5.2 Identification

5.2.1 Identification label: Outdoor unit

Location

Model identification
Example: EP G A 11 DA V3
Code Explanation
EP European hydro-split outdoor pair heat pump
G Medium water temperature – ambient zone: −10~−20°C
A Refrigerant R32
11 Capacity class
DA Model series
V3 Power supply

5.2.2 Identification label: Indoor unit

Location

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
26 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 5 | About the units and options
Model identification
Example: E AB H 16 DF 6V
Code Description
E European model
AB Wall-mounted hydro-split unit with separated tank
H H=Heating only
X=Heating/cooling
16 Capacity class
DF Model series
6V Backup heater model

5.3 Combining units and options

INFORMATION
Certain options might NOT be available in your country.

5.3.1 Possible options for the outdoor unit

Bottom plate heater (EKBPH140L7)
▪ Prevents freeze-up of the bottom plate.
▪ Recommended in areas with low ambient temperature and high humidity.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the bottom plate heater.

5.3.2 Possible options for the indoor unit

User interface used as room thermostat (BRC1HHDA)
▪ The user interface used as room thermostat can only be used in combination
with the user interface connected to the indoor unit.
▪ The user interface used as room thermostat needs to be installed in the room
that you want to control.
For installation instructions, see the installation and operation manual of the user
interface used as room thermostat.
Room thermostat (EKRTWA, EKRTR1)
You can connect an optional room thermostat to the indoor unit. This thermostat
can either be wired (EKRTWA) or wireless (EKRTR1).
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the room thermostat
and addendum book for optional equipment.
Remote sensor for wireless thermostat (EKRTETS)
You can use the remote indoor temperature sensor (EKRTETS) only in combination
with the wireless thermostat (EKRTR1).
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the room thermostat
and the addendum book for optional equipment.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 27
5 | About the units and options
Digital I/O PCB (EKRP1HBAA)
The digital I/O PCB is required to provide following signals:
▪ Alarm output
▪ Space heating/cooling ON/OFF output
▪ Changeover to external heat source
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the digital I/O PCB and
addendum book for optional equipment.
Demand PCB (EKRP1AHTA)
To enable the power saving consumption control by digital inputs you MUST install
the demand PCB.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the demand PCB and
addendum book for optional equipment.
Remote indoor sensor (KRCS01-1)
By default the internal user interface sensor will be used as room temperature
sensor.
As an option the remote indoor sensor can be installed to measure the room
temperature on another location.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote indoor
sensor and addendum book for optional equipment.

INFORMATION
▪ The remote indoor sensor can only be used in case the user interface is
configured with room thermostat functionality.
▪ You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or the remote outdoor
sensor.

Remote outdoor sensor (EKRSCA1)

By default the sensor inside the outdoor unit will be used to measure the outdoor
temperature.
As an option the remote outdoor sensor can be installed to measure the outdoor
temperature on another location (e.g. to avoid direct sunlight) to have an
improved system behaviour.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote outdoor
sensor and the addendum book for optional equipment.

INFORMATION
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or the remote outdoor sensor.

PC cable (EKPCCAB4)
The PC cable makes a connection between the switch box of the indoor unit and a
PC. It gives the possibility to update the software of the indoor unit.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the PC cable.
Heat pump convector (FWXV)
For providing space heating/cooling, it is possible to use heat pump convectors
(FWXV).

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
28 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 5 | About the units and options
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the heat pump
convectors, and the addendum book for optional equipment.
LAN adapter for smartphone control + Smart Grid applications (BRP069A61)
You can install this LAN adapter to:
▪ Control the system via a smartphone app.
▪ Use the system in various Smart Grid applications.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN adapter.
LAN adapter for smartphone control (BRP069A62)
You can install this LAN adapter to control the system via a smartphone app.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN adapter.
Universal centralised controller (EKCC8-W)
Controller for cascade control.
Bizone kit (BZKA7V3)
You can install an optional bizone kit.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the bizone kit.
Connection kit for third‑party tank (EKHY3PART)
Required when connecting a third-party tank to the system.
Contains a thermistor, a 3-way valve, and a contactor K3M – terminal X7M
assembly.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the connection kit.
Connection kit for third‑party tank with built‑in thermostat (EKHY3PART2)
Kit for the connection of a third‑party tank with built‑in thermostat to the system.
The kit converts a thermostat demand from the tank to a domestic hot water
request for the indoor unit.
Smart grid relay kit (EKRELSG)
The installation of the optional Smart grid relay kit is required in case of high
voltage Smart grid contacts (EKRELSG).
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the Smart grid relay kit.

5.3.3 Possible combinations of indoor unit and outdoor unit

Indoor unit Outdoor unit
EPGA11 EPGA14 EPGA16
EABH/X O O O

5.3.4 Possible combinations of indoor unit and domestic hot water tank
Indoor unit Domestic hot water tank
EKHWS EKHWSU EKHWP
EABH/X O O O

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 29
6 | Application guidelines

6 Application guidelines
INFORMATION
Cooling is only applicable in case of:
▪ Reversible models
▪ Heating only models + conversion kit (EKHBCONV*)

INFORMATION
Cooling is only applicable in case of reversible models.

6.1 Overview: Application guidelines

The purpose of the application guidelines is to give a glance of the possibilities of
the heat pump system.

NOTICE
▪ The illustrations in the application guidelines are meant for reference only, and
are NOT to be used as detailed hydraulic diagrams. The detailed hydraulic
dimensioning and balancing are NOT shown, and are the responsibility of the
installer.
▪ For more information about the configuration settings to optimize heat pump
operation, see "10 Configuration" 4
[ 99].

This chapter contains application guidelines for:

▪ Setting up the space heating/cooling system
▪ Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating
▪ Setting up the domestic hot water tank
▪ Setting up the energy metering
▪ Setting up the power consumption control
▪ Setting up an external temperature sensor

6.2 Setting up the space heating/cooling system

The heat pump system supplies leaving water to heat emitters in one or more
rooms.
Because the system offers a wide flexibility to control the temperature in each
room, you need to answer the following questions first:
▪ How many rooms are heated or cooled by the heat pump system?
▪ Which heat emitter types are used in each room and what is their design leaving
water temperature?
Once the space heating/cooling requirements are clear, we recommend to follow
the setup guidelines below.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
30 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines

NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room thermostat will control the
room frost protection. However, the room frost protection is only possible if [C.2]
Space heating/cooling=On.

INFORMATION
In case an external room thermostat is used and room frost protection needs to be
guaranteed in all conditions, then you have to set Emergency [9.5.1] to
Automatic.

NOTICE
An overpressure bypass valve can be integrated in the system. Keep in mind that this
valve might not be shown on the illustrations.

6.2.1 Single room

Underfloor heating or radiators – Wired room thermostat

Setup

A
B

A Main leaving water temperature zone

B One single room
a User interface used as room thermostat
▪ The underfloor heating or radiators are connected as follows:
- Warm water → Indoor unit
- Cold water → Outdoor unit
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user interface used
as a room thermostat (optional equipment BRC1H).
Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 2 (Room thermostat): Unit operation
▪ #: [2.9] is decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature zones: 0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 31
6 | Application guidelines
Benefits
▪ Highest comfort and efficiency. The smart room thermostat functionality can
decrease or increase the desired leaving water temperature based on the actual
room temperature (modulation). This results in:
- Stable room temperature matching the desired temperature (higher comfort)
- Less ON/OFF cycles (more quiet, higher comfort and higher efficiency)
- Lowest possible leaving water temperature (higher efficiency)
▪ Easy. You can easily set the desired room temperature via the user interface:
- For your daily needs, you can use preset values and schedules.
- To deviate from your daily needs, you can temporarily overrule the preset
values and schedules, or use the holiday mode.

Underfloor heating or radiators – Wireless room thermostat

Setup

A
B

a
b

A Main leaving water temperature zone

B One single room
a Receiver for wireless external room thermostat
b Wireless external room thermostat
▪ The underfloor heating or radiators are connected as follows:
- Warm water → Indoor unit
- Cold water → Outdoor unit
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the wireless external room thermostat
(optional equipment EKRTR1).
Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 1 (External room thermostat):
▪ #: [2.9] Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature zones: 0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the main 1 (1 contact): When the used
zone: external room thermostat or heat pump
▪ #: [2.A] convector can only send a thermo ON/
OFF condition. No separation between
▪ Code: [C-05] heating or cooling demand.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
32 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
Benefits
▪ Wireless. The Daikin external room thermostat is available in a wireless version.
▪ Efficiency. Although the external room thermostat only sends ON/OFF signals, it
is specifically designed for the heat pump system.
▪ Comfort. In case of underfloor heating, the wireless external room thermostat
prevents condensation on the floor during cooling operation by measuring the
room humidity.

Heat pump convectors

Setup

A
B

A Main leaving water temperature zone

B One single room
a Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The heat pump convectors are connected as follows:
- Warm water → Indoor unit
- Cold water → Outdoor unit
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital input on the
indoor unit (X2M/35 and X2M/30).
▪ The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by one digital
output on the indoor unit (X2M/4 and X2M/3).

INFORMATION
When using multiple heat pump convectors, make sure each one receives the
infrared signal from the remote controller of the heat pump convectors.

Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 1 (External room thermostat):
▪ #: [2.9] Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature zones: 0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 33
6 | Application guidelines
Setting Value
External room thermostat for the main 1 (1 contact): When the used
zone: external room thermostat or heat pump
▪ #: [2.A] convector can only send a thermo ON/
OFF condition. No separation between
▪ Code: [C-05] heating or cooling demand.

Benefits
▪ Cooling. The heat pump convector offers, besides heating capacity, also excellent
cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Optimal energy efficiency because of the interlink function.
▪ Stylish.

Combination: Underfloor heating + Heat pump convectors

▪ Space heating is provided by:
- The underfloor heating
- The heat pump convectors
▪ Space cooling is provided by the heat pump convectors only. The underfloor
heating is shut off by the shut-off valve.
Setup

A
B

M1

A Main leaving water temperature zone

B One single room
a Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The heat pump convectors are connected as follows:
- Warm water → Indoor unit
- Cold water → Outdoor unit
▪ A shut-off valve (field supply) is installed before the underfloor heating to
prevent condensation on the floor during cooling operation.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital input on the
indoor unit (X2M/35 and X2M/30).
▪ The space operation mode is sent by one digital output (X2M/4 and X2M/3) on
the indoor unit to:
- The heat pump convectors
- The shut-off valve

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
34 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 1 (External room thermostat):
▪ #: [2.9] Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature zones: 0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the main 1 (1 contact): When the used
zone: external room thermostat or heat pump
▪ #: [2.A] convector can only send a thermo ON/
OFF condition. No separation between
▪ Code: [C-05] heating or cooling demand.

Benefits
▪ Cooling. Heat pump convectors provide, besides heating capacity, also excellent
cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Underfloor heating has the best performance with the heat pump
system.
▪ Comfort. The combination of the two heat emitter types provides:
- The excellent heating comfort of the underfloor heating
- The excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors

6.2.2 Multiple rooms – One LWT zone

If only one leaving water temperature zone is needed because the design leaving
water temperature of all heat emitters is the same, you do NOT need a mixing
valve station (cost effective).
Example: If the heat pump system is used to heat up one floor where all the rooms
have the same heat emitters.

Underfloor heating or radiators – Thermostatic valves

If you are heating up rooms with underfloor heating or radiators, a very common
way is to control the temperature of the main room by using a thermostat (this can
either be the user interface or an external room thermostat), while the other
rooms are controlled by so-called thermostatic valves, which open or close
depending on the room temperature.
Setup

A
B C

A Main leaving water temperature zone

B Room 1

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 35
6 | Application guidelines
C Room 2
a User interface used as room thermostat
▪ The underfloor heating of the main room is connected as follows:
- Warm water → Indoor unit
- Cold water → Outdoor unit
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user interface used
as a room thermostat (optional equipment BRC1H).
▪ A thermostatic valve is installed before the underfloor heating in each of the
other rooms.

INFORMATION
Mind situations where the main room can be heated by another heating source.
Example: Fireplaces.

Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 2 (Room thermostat): Unit operation
▪ #: [2.9] is decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature zones: 0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]

Benefits
▪ Easy. Same installation as for one room, but with thermostatic valves.

Underfloor heating or radiators – Multiple external room thermostats

Setup

A
B C

b
M1 M2

a a

A Main leaving water temperature zone

B Room 1
C Room 2
a External room thermostat
b Bypass valve
▪ For each room, a shut-off valve (field supplied) is installed to avoid leaving water
supply when there is no heating or cooling demand.
▪ A bypass valve must be installed to make water recirculation possible when all
shut-off valves are closed. To guarantee reliable operation, provide a minimum
water flow as described in table "To check the water volume and flow rate" in
"8.1 Preparing water piping" [470].

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
36 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
▪ The user interface integrated in the indoor unit decides the space operation
mode. Mind that the operation mode on each room thermostat must be set to
match the indoor unit.
▪ The room thermostats are connected to the shut-off valves, but do NOT have to
be connected to the indoor unit. The indoor unit will supply leaving water all the
time, with the possibility to program a leaving water schedule.
Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 0 (Leaving water): Unit operation is
▪ #: [2.9] decided based on the leaving water
temperature.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature zones: 0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]

Benefits
Compared with underfloor heating or radiators for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including schedules, for
each room via the room thermostats.

Heat pump convectors – Multiple rooms

Setup

A
B C

a a

A Main leaving water temperature zone

B Room 1
C Room 2
a Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
▪ The user interface integrated in the indoor unit decides the space operation
mode.
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump convector are
connected in parallel to the digital input on the indoor unit (X2M/35 and
X2M/30). The indoor unit will only supply leaving water temperature when there
is an actual demand.

INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, we recommend to install the valve kit option
EKVKHPC on each heat pump convector.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 37
6 | Application guidelines
Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 1 (External room thermostat):
▪ #: [2.9] Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature zones: 0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]

Benefits
Compared with heat pump convectors for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including schedules, for
each room via the remote controller of the heat pump convectors.

Combination: Underfloor heating + Heat pump convectors – Multiple rooms

Setup

A
B C

M1

M1

b
a

A Main leaving water temperature zone

B Room 1
C Room 2
a External room thermostat
b Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The heat pump convectors are
connected as follows:
- Warm water → Indoor unit
- Cold water → Outdoor unit
▪ For each room with underfloor heating: Two shut-off valves (field supply) are
installed before the underfloor heating:
- A shut-off valve to prevent hot water supply when the room has no heating
demand
- A shut-off valve to prevent condensation on the floor during cooling operation
of the rooms with heat pump convectors.
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The desired room temperature is set
via the remote controller of the heat pump convectors.
▪ For each room with underfloor heating: The desired room temperature is set via
the external room thermostat (wired or wireless).
▪ The user interface integrated in the indoor unit decides the space operation
mode. Mind that the operation mode on each external room thermostat and
remote controller of the heat pump convectors must be set to match the indoor
unit.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
38 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines

INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, we recommend to install the valve kit option
EKVKHPC on each heat pump convector.

Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 0 (Leaving water): Unit operation is
▪ #: [2.9] decided based on the leaving water
temperature.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature zones: 0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]

6.2.3 Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones

In this document:
▪ Main zone = Zone with the lowest design temperature in heating, and the highest
design temperature in cooling
▪ Additional zone = Zone with the highest design temperature in heating, and the
lowest design temperature in cooling

CAUTION
If there is more than one leaving water zone, ALWAYS install a mixing valve station in
the main zone to decrease (in heating)/increase (in cooling) the leaving water
temperature when the additional zone has demand.

Typical example:
Room (zone) Heat emitters: Design temperature
Living room (main zone) Underfloor heating:
▪ In heating: 35°C
▪ In cooling: 20°C (only refreshment, no
real cooling allowed)
Bed rooms (additional zone) Heat pump convectors:
▪ In heating: 45°C
▪ In cooling: 12°C

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 39
6 | Application guidelines
Setup
A
B C

a a

D
c E
d

A Additional leaving water temperature zone

B Room 1
C Room 2
D Main leaving water temperature zone
E Room 3
a Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
b User interface used as room thermostat
c Mixing valve station
d Pressure regulating valve

INFORMATION
A pressure regulating valve should be implemented before the mixing valve station.
This is to guarantee the correct water flow balance between the main leaving water
temperature zone and the additional leaving water temperature zone in relation to
the required capacity of both water temperature zones.

▪ For the main zone:

- A mixing valve station is installed before the underfloor heating.
- The pump of the mixing valve station is controlled by the ON/OFF signal on the
indoor unit (X2M/29 and X2M/21; normally closed shut-off valve output).
- The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which is used as
room thermostat (optional equipment BRC1H).
▪ For the additional zone:
- The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor unit.
- The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of the
heat pump convectors for each room.
- The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump convector are
connected in parallel to the digital input on the indoor unit (X2M/35 and
X2M/30). The indoor unit will only supply the desired additional leaving water
temperature when there is an actual demand.
▪ The user interface integrated in the indoor unit decides the space operation
mode. Mind that the operation mode on each remote controller of the
heat pump convectors must be set to match the indoor unit.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
40 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
Configuration
Setting Value
Unit temperature control: 2 (Room thermostat): Unit operation
▪ #: [2.9] is decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Note:
▪ Main room = user interface used as
room thermostat functionality
▪ Other rooms = external room
thermostat functionality
Number of water temperature zones: 1 (Dual zone): Main + additional
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
In case of heat pump convectors: 1 (1 contact): When the used
External room thermostat for the external room thermostat or heat pump
additional zone: convector can only send a thermo ON/
OFF condition. No separation between
▪ #: [3.A] heating or cooling demand.
▪ Code: [C-06]
Shut-off valve output Set to follow the thermo demand of the
main zone.
Shut-off valve If the main zone must be shut off during
cooling mode to prevent condensation
on the floor, set it accordingly.
At the mixing valve station Set the desired main leaving water
temperature for heating and/or cooling.

Benefits
▪ Comfort.
- The smart room thermostat functionality can decrease or increase the desired
leaving water temperature based on the actual room temperature
(modulation).
- The combination of the two heat emitter systems provides the excellent
heating comfort of the underfloor heating, and the excellent cooling comfort of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ Efficiency.
- Depending on the demand, the indoor unit supplies different leaving water
temperature matching the design temperature of the different heat emitters.
- Underfloor heating has the best performance with the heat pump system.

6.3 Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating

INFORMATION
Bivalent is only possible in case of 1 leaving water temperature zone with:
▪ room thermostat control, OR
▪ external room thermostat control.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 41
6 | Application guidelines
▪ Space heating can be done by:
- The indoor unit
- An auxiliary boiler (field supply) connected to the system
▪ When there is a heating request, the indoor unit or the auxiliary boiler starts
operating. Which of these units operates, depends on the outdoor temperature
(status of the changeover to external heat source). When the permission is given
to the auxiliary boiler, the space heating by the indoor unit is turned OFF.
▪ Bivalent operation is only possible if:
- Space heating is turned ON, and
- DHW tank operation is turned OFF
▪ Domestic hot water is always produced by the DHW tank connected to the
indoor unit.

INFORMATION
▪ During heating operation of the heat pump, the heat pump operates to achieve
the desired temperature set via the user interface. When weather-dependent
operation is active, the water temperature is determined automatically
depending on the outdoor temperature.
▪ During heating operation of the auxiliary boiler, the auxiliary boiler operates to
achieve the desired water temperature set via the auxiliary boiler controller.

Setup
▪ Integrate the auxiliary boiler as follows:

a c f g h j
b
M

h
d e
i

f k

l i

FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
m

a Outdoor unit
b Indoor unit
c Heat exchanger
d Backup heater
e Pump
f Shut-off valve
g Motorised 3‑way valve
h Non-return valve (field supply)
i Shut-off valve (field supply)
j Collector (field supply)
k Auxiliary boiler (field supply)
l Aquastat valve (field supply)
m DHW tank (EHBH/X: option)
n Heat exchanger coil
Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)
Daikin Altherma 3 H W
42 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
FHL1...3 Under floor heating

NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary boiler and its integration in the system complies with
applicable legislation.
▪ Daikin is NOT responsible for incorrect or unsafe situations in the auxiliary boiler
system.

▪ Make sure the return water to the heat pump does NOT exceed 60°C. To do so:
- Set the desired water temperature via the auxiliary boiler controller to
maximum 60°C.
- Install an aquastat valve in the return water flow of the heat pump. Set the
aquastat valve to close above 60°C and to open below 60°C.
▪ Install non-return valves.
▪ An expansion vessel is already pre-mounted in the indoor unit. But for bivalent
operation, also make sure that there is an expansion vessel in the auxiliary boiler
loop. Otherwise when bivalent operation is running and if the Aquastat valve
would close, there would be no expansion vessel in the water circuit anymore.
▪ Install the digital I/O PCB (option EKRP1HBAA).
▪ Connect X1 and X2 (changeover to external heat source) on the digital I/O PCB to
the auxiliary boiler. See "9.3.8 To connect the changeover to external heat
source" [495].
▪ To setup the heat emitters, see "6.2 Setting up the space heating/cooling
system" [430].
Configuration
Via the user interface (configuration wizard):
▪ Set the use of a bivalent system as external heat source.
▪ Set the bivalent temperature and hysteresis.
▪ Set the operation mode to space heating only (no tank operation).
Changeover to external heat source decided by an auxiliary contact
▪ Only possible in external room thermostat control AND one leaving water
temperature zone (see "6.2 Setting up the space heating/cooling system" [430]).
▪ The auxiliary contact can be:
- An outdoor temperature thermostat
- An electricity tariff contact
- A manually operated contact
- …
▪ Setup: Connect the following field wiring:
L
H Com

Indoor
Indoor/Auto/Boiler X2M BTI
35 30 X Y
A

K1A K2A
K1A K2A
N

BTI Boiler thermostat input

A Auxiliary contact (normally closed)
H Heating demand room thermostat (optional)

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 43
6 | Application guidelines
K1A Auxiliary relay for activation of indoor unit (field supply)
K2A Auxiliary relay for activation of boiler (field supply)
Indoor Indoor unit
Auto Automatic
Boiler Boiler

NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary contact has enough differential or time delay to prevent
frequent changeover between indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
▪ If the auxiliary contact is an outdoor temperature thermostat, install the
thermostat in the shadow so that it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF by direct
sunlight.
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the auxiliary boiler. Contact the
manufacturer of the auxiliary boiler for more information.

Setpoint of the auxiliary gas boiler

To prevent freeze-up of the water piping, the auxiliary gas boiler must have a fixed
setpoint ≥55°C, or a weather-dependent setpoint ≥Tmin.
Tmin (°C)
60

50

40

30

20

10

0
–30 –25 –20 –15 –10 –5 0 5
Ta (°C)

Ta Outdoor temperature
Tmin Minimum weather-dependent setpoint for auxiliary gas boiler

6.4 Setting up the domestic hot water tank

6.4.1 System layout – Integrated DHW tank

6.4.2 System layout – Standalone DHW tank

a c f g h
b
M

d e

f
FHL1
FHL2
i j FHL3

a Outdoor unit
b Indoor unit

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
44 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
c Heat exchanger
d Backup heater
e Pump
f Shut-off valve
g Motorised 3‑way valve
h Collector (field supply)
i DHW tank
j Heat exchanger coil
FHL1...3 Under floor heating

6.4.3 Selecting the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank
People experience water as hot when its temperature is 40°C. Therefore, the DHW
consumption is always expressed as equivalent hot water volume at 40°C.
However, you can set the DHW tank temperature at a higher temperature
(example: 53°C), which is then mixed with cold water (example: 15°C).
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank consists of:
1 Determining the DHW consumption (equivalent hot water volume at 40°C).
2 Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank.
Determining the DHW consumption
Answer the following questions and calculate the DHW consumption (equivalent
hot water volume at 40°C) using typical water volumes:
Question Typical water volume
How many showers are needed per 1 shower = 10 min×10 l/min = 100 l
day?
How many baths are needed per day? 1 bath = 150 l
How much water is needed at the 1 sink = 2 min×5 l/min = 10 l
kitchen sink per day?
Are there any other domestic hot water —
needs?
Example: If the DHW consumption of a family (4 persons) per day is as follows:
▪ 3 showers
▪ 1 bath
▪ 3 sink volumes
Then the DHW consumption = (3×100 l)+(1×150 l)+(3×10 l)=480 l
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank
Formula Example
V1=V2+V2×(T2−40)/(40−T1) If:
▪ V2=180 l
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
Then V1=280 l
V2=V1×(40−T1)/(T2−T1) If:
▪ V1=480 l
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
Then V2=307 l

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 45
6 | Application guidelines
V1 DHW consumption (equivalent hot water volume at 40°C)
V2 Required DHW tank volume if only heated once
T2 DHW tank temperature
T1 Cold water temperature

Possible DHW tank volumes

Type Possible volumes
Standalone DHW tank ▪ 150 l
▪ 180 l
▪ 200 l
▪ 250 l
▪ 300 l (polypropylene tank is
compatible with solar kit)
▪ 500 l (compatible with solar kit)

Energy saving tips

▪ If the DHW consumption differs from day to day, you can program a weekly
schedule with different desired DHW tank temperatures for each day.
▪ The lower the desired DHW tank temperature, the more cost effective. By
selecting a larger DHW tank, you can lower the desired DHW tank temperature.
▪ The heat pump itself can produce domestic hot water of maximum 55°C (50°C if
outdoor temperature is low). The electrical resistance integrated in the
heat pump can increase this temperature. However, this consumes more energy.
We recommend to set the desired DHW tank temperature below 55°C to avoid
using the electrical resistance.
▪ The higher the outdoor temperature, the better the performance of the
heat pump.
- If energy prices are the same during the day and the night, we recommend to
heat up the DHW tank during the day.
- If energy prices are lower during the night, we recommend to heat up the DHW
tank during the night.
▪ When the heat pump produces domestic hot water, it cannot heat up a space. In
case you need domestic hot water and space heating at the same, we
recommend to produce the domestic hot water during the night when there is
lower space heating demand.

6.4.4 Setup and configuration – DHW tank

▪ For large DHW consumptions, you can heat up the DHW tank several times
during the day.
▪ To heat up the DHW tank to the desired DHW tank temperature, you can use the
following energy sources:
- Thermodynamic cycle of the heat pump
- Electrical booster heater

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
46 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
▪ For more information about:
- Optimizing the energy consumption for producing domestic hot water, see
"10 Configuration" [499].
- Connecting the electrical wiring of the standalone DHW tank to the indoor unit,
see the installation manual of the DHW tank, and the addendum book for
optional equipment.
- Connecting the water piping of the standalone DHW tank to the indoor unit,
see the installation manual of the DHW tank.

6.4.5 DHW pump for instant hot water

Setup
h

c f
a i
b
g

a Indoor unit
b DHW tank
c DHW pump (field supply)
f Shower (field supply)
g Cold water
h Domestic hot water OUT
i Recirculation connection
▪ By connecting a DHW pump, instant hot water can be available at the tap.
▪ The DHW pump and the installation are field supply and the responsibility of the
installer. For the electrical wiring, see "9.3.5 To connect the domestic hot water
pump" [493].
▪ For more information about connecting the recirculation connection, see the
installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
Configuration
▪ For more information, see "10 Configuration" [499].
▪ You can program a schedule to control the DHW pump via the user interface. For
more information, see the user reference guide.

6.4.6 DHW pump for disinfection

Setup
h
c
a i d f
b
e g

a Indoor unit
b DHW tank
c DHW pump (field supply)
d Heater element (field supply)
e Non‑return valve (field supply)
f Shower (field supply)
g Cold water
h Domestic hot water OUT
i Recirculation connection
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the responsibility of the
installer. For the electrical wiring, see "9.3.5 To connect the domestic hot water
pump" [493].

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 47
6 | Application guidelines
▪ If the applicable legislation requires a higher temperature than the maximum
tank setpoint during disinfection (see [2-03] in the field settings table), you can
connect a DHW pump and heater element as shown above.
▪ If applicable legislation requires disinfection of the water piping until the tapping
point, you can connect a DHW pump and heater element (if needed) as shown
above.
Configuration
The indoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more information, see
"10 Configuration" [499].

6.4.7 DHW pump for tank preheating

Setup
g
c
a h e
b
d f

a Indoor unit
b DHW tank
c DHW pump (field supply)
d Non‑return valve (field supply)
e Shower (field supply)
f Cold water
g Domestic hot water OUT
h Recirculation connection
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the responsibility of the
installer. For the electrical wiring, see "9.3.5 To connect the domestic hot water
pump" [493].
▪ For the standalone DHW tank: If there is no electrical backup heater in the space
heating circuit, you must install a DHW pump for tank preheating.
Configuration
The indoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more information, see
"10 Configuration" [499].

6.5 Setting up the energy metering

▪ Via the user interface, you can read out the following energy data:
- Produced heat
- Consumed energy
▪ You can read out the energy data:
- For space heating
- For space cooling
- For domestic hot water production
▪ You can read out the energy data:
- Per month
- Per year

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
48 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines

INFORMATION
The calculated produced heat and consumed energy are an estimation, the accuracy
cannot be guaranteed.

6.5.1 Produced heat

INFORMATION
The sensors used to calculate the produced heat are calibrated automatically.

INFORMATION
If glycol is present in the system ([E‑0D]=1]), then the produced heat will NOT be
calculated, nor will it be displayed on the user interface.

▪ The produced heat is calculated internally based on:

- The leaving and entering water temperature
- The flow rate
- The power consumption of the booster heater (if applicable) in the domestic
hot water tank
▪ Setup and configuration:
- No additional equipment needed.
- Only in case a booster heater is present in the system, measure its capacity
(resistance measurement) and set the capacity via the user interface. Example:
If you measure a booster heater resistance of 17.1Ω, the capacity of the heater
at 230 V is 3100 W.

6.5.2 Consumed energy

You can use the following methods to determine the consumed energy:
▪ Calculating
▪ Measuring

INFORMATION
You cannot combine calculating the consumed energy (example: for backup heater)
and measuring the consumed energy (example: for outdoor unit). If you do so, the
energy data will be invalid.

Calculating the consumed energy

▪ The consumed energy is calculated internally based on:
- The actual power input of the outdoor unit
- The set capacity of the backup heater and booster heater (if applicable)
- The voltage
▪ Setup and configuration: To get accurate energy data, measure the capacity
(resistance measurement) and set the capacity via the user interface for:
- The backup heater (step 1 and step 2) (if applicable)
- The booster heater

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 49
6 | Application guidelines
Measuring the consumed energy
▪ Preferred method because of higher accuracy.
▪ Requires external power meters.
▪ Setup and configuration: When using electrical power meters, set the number of
pulses/kWh for each power meter via the user interface.

INFORMATION
When measuring the electrical power consumption, make sure ALL power input of
the system is covered by the electrical power meters.

6.5.3 Normal kWh rate power supply

General rule
One power meter that covers the entire system is sufficient.
Setup
Connect the power meter to X5M/5 and X5M/6. See "9.3.4 To connect the
electricity meters" [493].
Power meter type
In case of… Use a… power meter
▪ Single-phase outdoor unit Single-phase
▪ Backup heater supplied from a single- (*3V, *6V (6V): 1N~ 230 V)
phase grid (i.e. the backup heater
model is *3V or *6V connected to a
single-phase grid)
▪ Three-phase outdoor unit Three-phase
▪ Backup heater supplied from a three- (*6V (6T1): 3~ 230 V)
phase grid (i.e. the backup heater (*9W: 3N~ 400 V)
model is *9W or *6V connected to a
three-phase grid)

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
50 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
Example
Single-phase power meter Three-phase power meter

0 0 58 0 0 58
0 5 0 5
1 0 1 0

a a

b b



c c c c d

d e f g e f g h
A B C A B C

A Outdoor unit A Outdoor unit

B Indoor unit B Indoor unit
C DHW tank C DHW tank
a Electrical cabinet (L1/N) a Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N)
b Power meter (L1/N) b Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
c Fuse (L1/N) c Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
d Outdoor unit (L1/N) d Fuse (L1/N)
e Indoor unit (L1/N) e Outdoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
f Backup heater (L1/N) f Indoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
g Booster heater (L1/N) g Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
h Booster heater (L1/N)

Exception
▪ You can use a second power meter if:
- The power range of one meter is insufficient.
- The electrical meter cannot easily be installed in the electrical cabinet.
- 230 V and 400 V three-phase grids are combined (very uncommon), because of
technical limitations of power meters.
▪ Connection and setup:
- Connect the second power meter to X5M/3 and X5M/4. See "9.3.4 To connect
the electricity meters" [493].
- In the software the power consumption data of both meters is added so you do
NOT have to set which meter covers which power consumption. You only need
to set the number of pulses of each power meter.
▪ See "6.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply" [4 51] for an example with two
power meters.

6.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply

General rule
▪ Power meter 1: Measures the outdoor unit.
▪ Power meter 2: Measures the rest (i.e. indoor unit, backup heater and optional
booster heater).

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 51
6 | Application guidelines
Setup
▪ Connect power meter 1 to X5M/5 and X5M/6.
▪ Connect power meter 2 to X5M/3 and X5M/4.
See "9.3.4 To connect the electricity meters" [493].
Power meter types
▪ Power meter 1: Single- or three-phase power meter according to the power
supply of the outdoor unit.
▪ Power meter 2:
- In case of a single-phase backup heater configuration, use a single-phase
power meter.
- In other cases, use a three-phase power meter.
Example
Single-phase outdoor unit with a three-phase backup heater:

0 0 58 0 0 58
0 5 0 5
1 0 1 0

a b

c d



e e f e

g h i j
A B C

A Outdoor unit
B Indoor unit
C DHW tank
a Electrical cabinet (L1/N): Preferential kWh rate power supply
b Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N): Normal kWh rate power supply
c Power meter (L1/N)
d Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
e Fuse (L1/N)
f Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
g Outdoor unit (L1/N)
h Indoor unit (L1/N)
i Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
j Booster heater (L1/N)

6.6 Setting up the power consumption control

▪ The power consumption control:
- Allows you to limit the power consumption of the entire system (sum of
outdoor unit, indoor unit, backup heater and optional booster heater).
- Configuration: Set the power limitation level and how it has to be achieved via
the user interface.
▪ The power limitation level can be expressed as:
- Maximum running current (in A)
- Maximum power input (in kW)

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
52 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines
▪ The power limitation level can be activated:
- Permanently
- By digital inputs

NOTICE
It is possible to install a field fuse with lower than recommended rating over the heat
pump. For this you must modify field setting [2‑0E] according to the maximum
allowed current over the heat pump.
Note that field setting [2‑0E] overrules all power consumption control settings.
Power limiting the heat pump will reduce performance.

NOTICE
Set a minimum power consumption of ±3.6 kW to guarantee:
▪ Defrost operation. Otherwise, if defrosting is interrupted several times, the heat
exchanger will freeze up.
▪ Space heating and DHW production by allowing the backup heater step 1.

6.6.1 Permanent power limitation

Permanent power limitation is useful to assure a maximum power or current input
of the system. In some countries, legislation limits the maximum power
consumption for space heating and DHW production.
Pi
a
DI

Pi Power input
t Time
DI Digital input (power limitation level)
a Power limitation active
b Actual power input

Setup and configuration

▪ No additional equipment needed.
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [9.9] via the user interface (see
"Power consumption control" [4158]):
- Select continuous limitation mode
- Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A)
- Set the desired power limitation level

6.6.2 Power limitation activated by digital inputs

Power limitation is also useful in combination with an energy management system.
The power or current of the entire Daikin system is limited dynamically by digital
inputs (maximum four steps). Each power limitation level is set via the user
interface by limiting one of the following:
▪ Current (in A)
▪ Power input (in kW)

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 53
6 | Application guidelines
The energy management system (field supply) decides the activation of a certain
power limitation level. Example: To limit the maximum power of the entire house
(lighting, domestic appliances, space heating…).

D
a
5
4
3
A8P 21

b c
A B C

A Outdoor unit
B Indoor unit
C DHW tank
D Energy management system
a Power limitation activation (4 digital inputs)
b Backup heater
c Booster heater
Pi
a
DI1

DI3

b
DI4
t

Pi Power input
t Time
DI Digital inputs (power limitation levels)
a Power limitation active
b Actual power input

Setup
▪ Demand PCB (option EKRP1AHTA) needed.
▪ Maximum four digital inputs are used to activate the corresponding power
limitation level:
- DI1 = strongest limitation (lowest energy consumption)
- DI4 = weakest limitation (highest energy consumption)
▪ Specification of the digital inputs:
- DI1: S9S (limit 1)
- DI2: S8S (limit 2)
- DI3: S7S (limit 3)
- DI4: S6S (limit 4)
▪ Refer to the wiring diagram for more information.
Configuration
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [9.9] via the user interface (for the
description of all settings, see "Power consumption control" [4158]):
- Select limitation by digital inputs.
- Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A).
- Set the desired power limitation level corresponding to each digital input.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
54 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 6 | Application guidelines

INFORMATION
In case more than 1 digital input is closed (at the same time), the digital input priority
is fixed: DI4 priority>…>DI1.

6.6.3 Power limitation process

The outdoor unit has better efficiency than the electrical heaters. Therefore, the
electrical heaters are limited and turned OFF first. The system limits power
consumption in the following order:
1 Limits certain electrical heaters.
If… has priority Then set the priority heater via the
user interface to…
Domestic hot water production Booster heater (if applicable)
Result: The backup heater will be
turned OFF first.
Space heating Backup heater
Result: The booster heater (if
applicable) will be turned OFF first.
2 Turns OFF all electrical heaters.
3 Limits the outdoor unit.
4 Turns OFF the outdoor unit.
Example
If the configuration is as follows:
▪ Power limitation level does NOT allow operation of both booster heater and
backup heater (step 1 and step 2).
▪ Priority heater = Booster heater (if applicable).
Then power consumption is limited as follows:
Ph

e
d
c
b

a
Ce
A B C

Ph Produced heat
Ce Consumed energy
A Outdoor unit
B Booster heater
C Backup heater
a Limited outdoor unit operation
b Full outdoor unit operation
c Booster heater turned ON
d Backup heater step 1 turned ON
e Backup heater step 2 turned ON

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 55
6 | Application guidelines

6.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor

You can connect one external temperature sensor. It measures the indoor or
outdoor ambient temperature. We recommend to use an external temperature
sensor in the following cases:
Indoor ambient temperature
▪ In room thermostat control, the user interface used as room thermostat (BRC1H)
measures the indoor ambient temperature. Therefore, the user interface used as
room thermostat must be installed on a location:
- Where the average temperature in the room can be detected
- That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
- That is NOT near a heat source
- That is NOT affected by outside air or air draught because of, for example, door
opening/closing
▪ If this is NOT possible, we recommend to connect a remote indoor sensor (option
KRCS01-1).
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
indoor sensor, and the addendum book for optional equipment.
▪ Configuration: Select room sensor [9.B].
Outdoor ambient temperature
▪ In the outdoor unit, the outdoor ambient temperature is measured. Therefore,
the outdoor unit must be installed on a location:
- At the north side of the house or at the side of the house where the most heat
emitters are located
- That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
▪ If this is NOT possible, we recommend to connect a remote outdoor sensor
(option EKRSCA1).
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
outdoor sensor, and the addendum book for optional equipment.
▪ Configuration: Select outdoor sensor [9.B].
▪ When the power saving functionality of the outdoor unit is active (see "Power
saving function" [4 165]), the outdoor unit is turned down to reduce standby
energy losses. As a result, the outdoor ambient temperature is NOT read out.
▪ If the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent, the full time
outdoor temperature measurement is important. This is another reason to install
the optional outdoor ambient temperature sensor.

INFORMATION
The external outdoor ambient sensor data (either averaged or instantaneous) is used
in the weather-dependent control curves and in the automatic heating/cooling
changeover logic. To protect the outdoor unit, the internal sensor of the outdoor unit
is always used.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
56 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 7 | Unit installation

7 Unit installation
In this chapter
7.1 Preparing the installation site ................................................................................................................................................ 57
7.1.1 Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit ............................................................................................... 57
7.1.2 Additional installation site requirements of the outdoor unit in cold climates ................................................... 60
7.1.3 Installation site requirements of the indoor unit .................................................................................................. 60
7.2 Opening and closing the units................................................................................................................................................ 61
7.2.1 About opening the units ........................................................................................................................................ 61
7.2.2 To open the outdoor unit ...................................................................................................................................... 62
7.2.3 To remove the transportation stay........................................................................................................................ 62
7.2.4 To close the outdoor unit....................................................................................................................................... 63
7.2.5 To open the indoor unit ......................................................................................................................................... 63
7.2.6 To close the indoor unit ......................................................................................................................................... 65
7.3 Mounting the outdoor unit .................................................................................................................................................... 65
7.3.1 About mounting the outdoor unit ......................................................................................................................... 65
7.3.2 Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit...................................................................................................... 66
7.3.3 To provide the installation structure ..................................................................................................................... 66
7.3.4 To install the outdoor unit ..................................................................................................................................... 66
7.3.5 To provide drainage ............................................................................................................................................... 67
7.4 Mounting the indoor unit....................................................................................................................................................... 68
7.4.1 About mounting the indoor unit............................................................................................................................ 68
7.4.2 Precautions when mounting the indoor unit ........................................................................................................ 68
7.4.3 To install the indoor unit........................................................................................................................................ 68
7.4.4 To connect the drain hose to the drain ................................................................................................................. 69

7.1 Preparing the installation site

Choose an installation location with sufficient space for carrying the unit in and out
of the site.
Do NOT install the unit in places often used as work place. In case of construction
works (e.g. grinding works) where a lot of dust is created, the unit MUST be
covered.

WARNING
The appliance shall be stored in a room without continuously operating ignition
sources (example: open flames, an operating gas appliance or an operating electric
heater).

7.1.1 Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit

INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the "2 General safety
precautions" 4
[ 10].

Mind the spacing guidelines. See "16.1 Service space: Outdoor unit" [4202].

NOTICE
▪ Do NOT stack the units on each other.
▪ Do NOT hang the unit on a ceiling.

Strong winds (≥18 km/h) blowing against the outdoor unit’s air outlet causes short
circuit (suction of discharge air). This may result in:
▪ deterioration of the operational capacity;
EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 57
7 | Unit installation
▪ frequent frost acceleration in heating operation;
▪ disruption of operation due to decrease of low pressure or increase of high
pressure;
▪ a broken fan (if a strong wind blows continuously on the fan, it may start rotating
very fast, until it breaks).
It is recommended to install a baffle plate when the air outlet is exposed to wind.
It is recommended to install the outdoor unit with the air inlet facing the wall and
NOT directly exposed to the wind.

b
c

a
c

a Baffle plate
b Prevailing wind direction
c Air outlet
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the operation noise will
cause no trouble.
Note: If the sound is measured under actual installation conditions, the
measured value might be higher than the sound pressure level mentioned in
Sound spectrum in the data book due to environmental noise and sound
reflections.
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be present in the
atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall off or cause water leakage.
It is NOT recommended to install the unit in the following places because it may
shorten the life of the unit:
▪ Where the voltage fluctuates a lot
▪ In vehicles or vessels
▪ Where acidic or alkaline vapour is present
Seaside installation. Make sure the outdoor unit is NOT directly exposed to sea
winds. This is to prevent corrosion caused by high levels of salt in the air, which
might shorten the life of the unit.
Install the outdoor unit away from direct sea winds.
Example: Behind the building.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
58 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 7 | Unit installation

a
c

If the outdoor unit is exposed to direct sea winds, install a windbreaker.

▪ Height of windbreaker≥1.5×height of outdoor unit
▪ Mind the service space requirements when installing the windbreaker.
d
c

a
d
c

a Sea wind
b Building
c Outdoor unit
d Windbreaker
The outdoor unit is designed for outdoor installation only, and for the following
ambient temperatures:
Cooling mode 10~43°C
Heating mode –28~35°C

Special requirements for R32

The outdoor unit contains an internal refrigerant circuit (R32), but you do NOT
have to do any refrigerant field piping, or refrigerant charging.
Mind the following requirements and precautions:

WARNING
▪ Do NOT pierce or burn refrigerant cycle parts.
▪ Do NOT use means to accelerate the defrosting process or to clean the
equipment, other than those recommended by the manufacturer.
▪ Be aware that R32 refrigerant does NOT contain an odour.

WARNING
The appliance shall be stored so as to prevent mechanical damage and in a well-
ventilated room without continuously operating ignition sources (example: open
flames, an operating gas appliance or an operating electric heater).

WARNING
Make sure installation, servicing, maintenance and repair comply with instructions
from Daikin and with applicable legislation and are executed ONLY by authorised
persons.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 59
7 | Unit installation
7.1.2 Additional installation site requirements of the outdoor unit in cold climates
Protect the outdoor unit against direct snowfall and take care that the outdoor unit
is NEVER snowed up.

d
b
c

a Snow cover or shed

b Pedestal
c Prevailing wind direction
d Air outlet
In any case, provide at least 150 mm of free space below the unit. Additionally,
make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above the maximum expected
level of snow. See "7.3 Mounting the outdoor unit" [465] for more details.
In heavy snowfall areas it is very important to select an installation site where the
snow will NOT affect the unit. If lateral snowfall is possible, make sure that the heat
exchanger coil is NOT affected by the snow. If necessary, install a snow cover or
shed and a pedestal.

7.1.3 Installation site requirements of the indoor unit

INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the "2 General safety
precautions" 4
[ 10].

▪ The indoor unit is designed for indoor installation only and for the following
ambient temperatures:
- Space heating operation: 5~30°C
- Space cooling operation: 5~35°C
- Domestic hot water production: 5~35°C

INFORMATION
Cooling is only applicable in case of:
▪ Reversible models
▪ Heating only models + conversion kit (EKHBCONV*)

▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
60 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 7 | Unit installation
Maximum height difference between indoor unit and outdoor 10 m
unit
Maximum height difference between domestic hot water tank 10 m
and outdoor unit
Maximum water piping length between indoor unit and 10 m
domestic hot water tank
Maximum distance between the 3‑way valve and the indoor 3m
unit (for installations with domestic hot water tank)
Maximum total water piping length 50 m(a)
(a)
Precise water piping length can be determined using the Hydronic Piping Calculation tool.
The Hydronic Piping Calculation tool is part of the Heating Solutions Navigator which can
be reached via https://professional.standbyme.daikin.eu. Please contact your dealer if you
have no access to Heating Solutions Navigator.

▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:

≥200

≥200

≥500

≥450
H≥1150

(mm)

H Height measured from the bottom of the casing to the floor

Do NOT install the unit in places such as:
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be present in the
atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall off or cause water leakage.
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the operation noise will
cause no trouble.
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a bathroom.
▪ In places where frost is possible. Ambient temperature around the indoor unit
must be >5°C.

7.2 Opening and closing the units

7.2.1 About opening the units

At certain times, you have to open the unit. Example:
▪ When connecting the electrical wiring
▪ When maintaining or servicing the unit

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover is removed.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 61
7 | Unit installation
7.2.2 To open the outdoor unit

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

DANGER: RISK OF BURNING/SCALDING

1×

2
7
4 3
8
9

2×
2×
1
5

7.2.3 To remove the transportation stay

NOTICE
If the unit is operated with the transportation stay attached, abnormal vibration or
noise may be generated.

The compressor transportation stay must be removed. It is installed under the

compressor leg in order to protect the unit during transport. Proceed as shown in
the figure and procedure below.
1 Remove the nut (a) of the compressor mounting bolt.
2 Remove and discard the transportation stay (b).
3 Re-install the nut (a) of the compressor mounting bolt and tighten to
10.1 N•m of torque.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
62 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 7 | Unit installation

3
(10.1 N·m)
1
a
2
b

7.2.4 To close the outdoor unit

1 Close the switch box cover.
2 Mount the front plate and the side plate.

NOTICE
When closing the outdoor unit cover, make sure that the tightening torque does NOT
exceed 4.1 N•m.

7.2.5 To open the indoor unit

Overview
2 3
1

4 4

1 Front panel
2 Switch box cover
3 Switch box
4 User interface panel

Open
1 Remove the front panel.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 63
7 | Unit installation

2 If you have to connect electrical wiring, remove the switch box cover.

4×

3 If you have to do work behind the switch box, open the switch box.

2
1

2×

4 If you have to do work behind the user interface panel or upload new
software into the user interface, open the user interface panel.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
64 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 7 | Unit installation

2×
3

2
1

5 Optional: Remove the user interface panel.

NOTICE
If you remove the user interface panel, also disconnect the cables from the back of
the user interface panel to prevent damage.

7.2.6 To close the indoor unit

1 Reinstall the user interface panel.
2 Reinstall the switch box cover and close the switch box.
3 Reinstall the front panel.

NOTICE
When closing the indoor unit cover, make sure that the tightening torque does NOT
exceed 4.1 N•m.

7.3 Mounting the outdoor unit

7.3.1 About mounting the outdoor unit

When
You have to mount the outdoor unit before you can connect the water piping.
Typical workflow
Mounting the outdoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1 Providing the installation structure.
2 Installing the outdoor unit.
3 Preventing the unit from falling over.
4 Protecting the unit against snow and wind by installing a snow cover and baffle
plates. See "7.1 Preparing the installation site" [457].

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 65
7 | Unit installation
7.3.2 Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit

INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation

7.3.3 To provide the installation structure

Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the unit will not
cause any operating vibration or noise.
Fix the unit securely by means of foundation bolts in accordance with the
foundation drawing.
Prepare 6 sets of anchor bolts, nuts and washers (field supply) as follows:

6× M12

5
1.
26

35
0

0
62
(3
45
-3
5
5)

50
(mm) >1 a

a Make sure not to cover the drain holes.

In any case, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above the maximum
expected level of snow.

7.3.4 To install the outdoor unit

6× M12

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
66 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 7 | Unit installation
7.3.5 To provide drainage
▪ Make sure that condensation water can be evacuated properly.
▪ Install the unit on a base to make sure that there is proper drainage in order to
avoid ice accumulation.
▪ Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation to drain waste water
away from the unit.
▪ Avoid drain water flowing over the footpath, so that it does NOT become slippery
in case of ambient freezing temperatures.
▪ If you install the unit on a frame, install a waterproof plate within 150 mm of the
bottom side of the unit in order to prevent water from getting into the unit and
to avoid drain water dripping (see the following figure).

NOTICE
If the unit is installed in a cold climate, take adequate measures so that the
evacuated condensate CANNOT freeze.

Drain holes (dimensions in mm)

A

160 620 261.5 119

B
161
260
279
285

345
D

E
38
71 D D D D C
262
416
595

A Discharge side
B Distance between anchor points
C Bottom frame
D Drain holes
E Knockout hole for snow

NOTICE
If drain holes of the outdoor unit are covered by a mounting base or by floor surface,
raise the unit to provide a free space of more than 150 mm under the outdoor unit.
≥150 mm

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 67
7 | Unit installation

7.4 Mounting the indoor unit

7.4.1 About mounting the indoor unit

Typical workflow
Mounting the indoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1 Installing the indoor unit.

7.4.2 Precautions when mounting the indoor unit

INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation

7.4.3 To install the indoor unit

1 Fix the wall bracket (accessory) to the wall (level) with 2× Ø8 mm bolts.
a

2×

a Optional: If you want to fix the unit to the wall from inside the unit, provide an
additional screw plug.
2 Lift the unit.

42 kg

3 Attach the unit to the wall bracket:

▪ Tilt the top of the unit against the wall at the position of the wall bracket.
▪ Slide the bracket on the back of the unit over the wall bracket. Make sure
the unit is fixed properly.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
68 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 7 | Unit installation

4 Optional: If you want to fix the unit to the wall from inside the unit:
▪ Remove the upper front panel, and open the switch box. See "7.2.5 To open
the indoor unit" [463].
▪ Fix the unit to the wall with an Ø8 mm screw.

7.4.4 To connect the drain hose to the drain

Water coming from the pressure relief valve is collected in the drain pan. You must
connect the drain pan to an appropriate drain according to the applicable
legislation.
1 Connect a drain tube (field supply) to the drain pan connector as follows:

a Drain pan connector

It is recommended to use a tundish to collect the water.
EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 69
8 | Piping installation

8 Piping installation
In this chapter
8.1 Preparing water piping ........................................................................................................................................................... 70
8.1.1 Water circuit requirements ................................................................................................................................... 70
8.1.2 Formula to calculate the expansion vessel pre-pressure...................................................................................... 73
8.1.3 To check the water volume and flow rate............................................................................................................. 73
8.1.4 Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel ............................................................................................. 76
8.1.5 To check the water volume: Examples .................................................................................................................. 76
8.2 Connecting water piping ........................................................................................................................................................ 77
8.2.1 About connecting the water piping ....................................................................................................................... 77
8.2.2 Precautions when connecting the water piping.................................................................................................... 77
8.2.3 To connect the water piping.................................................................................................................................. 77
8.2.4 To fill the water circuit ........................................................................................................................................... 79
8.2.5 To protect the water circuit against freezing ........................................................................................................ 80
8.2.6 To fill the domestic hot water tank........................................................................................................................ 83
8.2.7 To insulate the water piping .................................................................................................................................. 83

8.1 Preparing water piping

▪ Valve towards expansion vessel. The valve towards the expansion vessel (if
equipped) MUST be open.

8.1.1 Water circuit requirements

INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the "2 General safety
precautions" 4
[ 10].

NOTICE
In case of plastic pipes, make sure they are fully oxygen diffusion tight according to
DIN 4726. The diffusion of oxygen into the piping can lead to excessive corrosion.

▪ Connecting piping – Legislation. Make all piping connections in accordance with

the applicable legislation and the instructions in the "Installation" chapter,
respecting the water inlet and outlet.
▪ Connecting piping – Force. Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the
piping. Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the unit.
▪ Connecting piping – Tools. Only use appropriate tooling to handle brass, which is
a soft material. If NOT, pipes will get damaged.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
70 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 8 | Piping installation
▪ Connecting piping – Air, moisture, dust. If air, moisture or dust gets into the
circuit, problems may occur. To prevent this:
- ONLY use clean pipes.
- Hold the pipe end downwards when removing burrs.
- Cover the pipe end when inserting it through a wall, to prevent dust and/or
particles from entering the pipe.
- Use a decent thread sealant to seal connections.
- When using non-brass metallic piping, make sure to insulate both materials
from each other to prevent galvanic corrosion.
- Because brass is a soft material, use appropriate tooling for connecting the
water circuit. Inappropriate tooling will cause damage to the pipes.
▪ Insulation. Insulate up to the base of the heat exchanger.
▪ Freeze. Protect against freezing.
▪ Closed circuit. Use the indoor unit ONLY in a closed water system. Using the
system in an open water system will lead to excessive corrosion.
▪ Piping length. It is recommended to avoid long runs of piping between the
domestic hot water tank and the hot water end point (shower, bath,…) and to
avoid dead ends.
▪ Piping diameter. Select the water piping diameter in relation to the required
water flow and the available external static pressure of the pump. See
"16 Technical data" [4 202] for the external static pressure curves of the indoor
unit.
▪ Water flow. You can find the minimum required water flow for indoor unit
operation in the following table. In all cases, this flow needs to be guaranteed.
When the flow is lower, the indoor unit will stop operation and display error 7H.
Minimum required flow rate
20 l/min
▪ Field supply components – Water. Only use materials that are compatible with
water used in the system and with the materials used in the indoor unit.
▪ Field supply components – Water pressure and temperature. Check that all
components in the field piping can withstand the water pressure and water
temperature.
▪ Water temperature. All installed piping and piping accessories (valve,
connections,…) MUST withstand the following temperatures:

INFORMATION
The following illustration is an example and might NOT match your system layout.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 71
8 | Piping installation

89°C (*)

75°C (*)

LE
M P
75°C (*)
X A
E M

(*) Maximum temperature for piping and accessories

▪ Drainage – Low points. Provide drain taps at all low points of the system in order
to allow complete drainage of the water circuit.
▪ Drainage – Pressure relief valve. Connect the drain hose properly to the drain to
avoid water dripping out of the unit. See "7.4.4 To connect the drain hose to the
drain" [469].
▪ Air vents. Provide air vents at all high points of the system, which must also be
easily accessible for servicing. Two automatic air purges are provided in the
indoor unit. Check that the air purges are NOT tightened too much, so that
automatic release of air in the water circuit is possible.
▪ Zn-coated parts. NEVER use zinc coated parts in the water circuit. Because the
internal water circuit of the unit uses copper piping, excessive corrosion may
occur.
▪ Non-brass metallic piping. When using non-brass metallic piping, insulate the
brass and non-brass properly so that they do NOT make contact with each other.
This to prevent galvanic corrosion.
▪ Valve – Separating circuits. When using a 3-way valve in the water circuit make
sure that the domestic hot water circuit and the floor heating circuit are fully
separated.
▪ Valve – Change‑over time. When using a 2-way valve or a 3-way valve in the
water circuit, the maximum change-over time of the valve must be 60 seconds.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Capacity. To avoid stagnation of water, it is
important that the storage capacity of the domestic hot water tank meets the
daily consumption of domestic hot water.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – After installation. Immediately after installation, the
domestic hot water tank must be flushed with fresh water. This procedure must
be repeated at least once a day the first 5 consecutive days after installation.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Standstills. In cases where during longer periods of
time there is no consumption of hot water, the equipment MUST be flushed with
fresh water before usage.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Disinfection. For the disinfection function of the
domestic hot water tank, see "10.5.6 Tank" [4142].

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
72 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 8 | Piping installation
▪ Thermostatic mixing valves. In accordance with the applicable legislation, it may
be necessary to install thermostatic mixing valves.
▪ Hygienic measures. The installation must be in compliance with the applicable
legislation and may require additional hygienic installation measures.
▪ Recirculation pump. In accordance with the applicable legislation, it may be
required to connect a recirculation pump in between the hot water end point
and the recirculation connection of the domestic hot water tank.

c
a b d

a Recirculation connection
b Hot water connection
c Shower
d Recirculation pump
▪ Valve towards expansion vessel. The valve towards the expansion vessel (if
equipped) MUST be open.

8.1.2 Formula to calculate the expansion vessel pre-pressure

The pre-pressure (Pg) of the vessel depends on the installation height difference
(H):
Pg=0.3+(H/10) (bar)

8.1.3 To check the water volume and flow rate

The indoor unit has an expansion vessel of 10 litre with a factory-set pre-pressure
of 1 bar.
To make sure that the unit operates properly:
▪ You MUST check the minimum and maximum water volume.
▪ You might need to adjust the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel.
Minimum water volume
Check that the total water volume in the installation is minimum 20 litres, the
internal water volume of the outdoor unit NOT included.

INFORMATION
In critical processes, or in rooms with a high heat load, extra water might be
required.

NOTICE
When circulation in each space heating/cooling loop is controlled by remotely
controlled valves, it is important that the minimum water volume is guaranteed,
even if all of the valves are closed.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 73
8 | Piping installation

a c f b d e f g h
T1 T2 T3

M1 M2 M3

f FHL1
FHL2
FHL3

a Outdoor unit
b Indoor unit
c Heat exchanger
d Backup heater
e Pump
f Shut-off valve
g Collector (field supply)
h Overpressure bypass valve (delivered as accessory)
FHL1...3 Floor heating loop (field supply)
T1...3 Individual room thermostat (optional)
M1...3 Individual motorised valve to control loop FHL1...3 (field supply)

Maximum water volume

NOTICE
The maximum water volume depends on whether glycol is added to the water
circuit. For more information on the addition of glycol, refer to "8.2.5 To protect the
water circuit against freezing" 4
[ 80].

Use the following graph to determine the maximum water volume for the
calculated pre-pressure.
A 2,4
2,1
1,8
1,5
1,2
1
0,9
0,6
0,3
20 70 120 140 175 200 220 255 270
B

A Pre-pressure (bar)
B Maximum water volume (l)
Water
Water + glycol

Example: Maximum water volume and expansion vessel pre-pressure

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
74 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 8 | Piping installation
Installation Water volume
height ≤200 l >200 l
difference(a)
≤7 m No pre-pressure adjustment is Do the following:
required. ▪ Decrease the pre-pressure
according to the required
installation height
difference. The pre-pressure
should decrease by 0.1 bar
for each metre below 7 m.
▪ Check if the water volume
does NOT exceed the
maximum allowed water
volume.
>7 m Do the following: The expansion vessel of the
▪ Increase the pre-pressure indoor unit is too small for the
according to the required installation. In this case, it is
installation height recommended to install an
difference. The pre-pressure extra vessel outside the unit.
should increase by 0.1 bar
for each metre above 7 m.
▪ Check if the water volume
does NOT exceed the
maximum allowed water
volume.
(a)
This is the height difference (m) between the highest point of the water circuit and the
indoor unit. If the indoor unit is at the highest point of the installation, the installation
height is 0 m.

Minimum flow rate

Check that the minimum flow rate in the installation is guaranteed in all conditions.
This minimum flow rate is required during defrost/backup heater operation. For
this purpose, use the overpressure bypass valve delivered with the unit, and
respect the minimum water volume.
Minimum required flow rate
20 l/min

NOTICE
To guarantee proper operation it is recommended to have a minimum flow of 28 l/
min during DHW.

NOTICE
If glycol was added to the water circuit, and the temperature of the water circuit is
low, the flow rate will NOT be displayed on the user interface. In this case, the
minimum flow rate can be checked by way of the pump test (check that the user
interface does NOT display error 7H).

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 75
8 | Piping installation

NOTICE
When circulation in each or certain space heating loops is controlled by remotely
controlled valves, it is important that the minimum flow rate is guaranteed, even if all
valves are closed. In case the minimum flow rate cannot be reached, a flow error 7H
will be generated (no heating or operation).

See the recommended procedure as described in "11.4 Checklist during

commissioning" [4171].

8.1.4 Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel

NOTICE
ONLY a licensed installer may adjust the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel.

The default pre-pressure of the expansion vessel is 1 bar. When it is required to

change the pre-pressure, take following guidelines into account:
▪ Only use dry nitrogen to set the expansion vessel pre-pressure.
▪ Inappropriate setting of the expansion vessel pre-pressure will lead to
malfunction of the system.
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel should be done by releasing or
increasing nitrogen pressure through the Schrader valve of the expansion vessel.

2
a

a Schrader valve

8.1.5 To check the water volume: Examples

Example 1
The indoor unit is installed 5 m below the highest point in the water circuit. The
total water volume in the water circuit is 100 l.
No actions or adjustments are required.
Example 2
The indoor unit is installed at the highest point in the water circuit. The total water
volume in the water circuit is 250 l.
Actions:
▪ Because the total water volume (250 l) is more than the default water volume
(200 l), the pre-pressure must be decreased.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
76 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 8 | Piping installation
▪ The required pre-pressure is:
Pg = (0.3+(H/10)) bar = (0.3+(0/10)) bar = 0.3 bar
▪ The corresponding maximum water volume at 0.3 bar is 290 l. (See the graph in
"Maximum water volume" [474]).
▪ Because 250 l is lower than 290 l, the expansion vessel is appropriate for the
installation.

8.2 Connecting water piping

8.2.1 About connecting the water piping

Before connecting the water piping
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted.
Typical workflow
Connecting the water piping typically consists of the following stages:
1 Connecting the water piping to the outdoor unit.
2 Connecting the drain hose to the drain.
3 Filling the water circuit.
4 Filling the domestic hot water tank.
5 Insulating the water piping.

8.2.2 Precautions when connecting the water piping

INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation

8.2.3 To connect the water piping

NOTICE
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the field piping and make sure the
piping is aligned properly. Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 77
8 | Piping installation
Outdoor unit

a c

a d
c

a Water IN (screw connection, male, 1")

b Water OUT (screw connection, male, 1")
c Shut-off valve with integrated filter (delivered as accessory)(2× screw connection,
female, 1")
d O-ring

NOTICE
About the shut-off valve with integrated filter (delivered as accessory):
▪ The installation of the valve at the water inlet is mandatory.
▪ Mind the flow direction of the valve.

1 Connect the O-rings and shut-off valve to the outdoor unit water inlet.
2 Connect the field piping to the shut-off valve.
3 Connect the field piping to the outdoor unit water outlet.

NOTICE
Install air purge valves at all local high points.

Indoor unit

NOTICE
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping. Deformation of the piping
can cause malfunctioning of the unit.

1 Connect the O-rings and shut-off valves to the indoor unit water connections.
2 Connect the outdoor unit field piping on the water IN connection (a) of the
indoor unit.
3 Connect the space heating/cooling field piping on the space heating water
OUT connection (b) of the indoor unit.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
78 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 8 | Piping installation

b a

a Water IN (screw connection, 1")

b Space heating water OUT (screw connection, 1")

NOTICE

Overpressure bypass valve (delivered as accessory). We recommend to install the

overpressure bypass valve in the space heating water circuit.
▪ Mind the minimum water volume when choosing the installation location of the
overpressure bypass valve (at the indoor unit, or at the collector). See "8.1.3 To
check the water volume and flow rate" 4
[ 73].
▪ Mind the minimum flow rate when adjusting the overpressure bypass valve
setting. See "8.1.3 To check the water volume and flow rate" 4
[ 73] and "11.4.1 To
check the minimum flow rate" 4 [ 171].

NOTICE
Install air purge valves at all local high points.

NOTICE
In case an optional domestic hot water tank is installed: A pressure relief valve (field
supply) with an opening pressure of maximum 10 bar (= 1 MPa) must be installed on
the domestic cold water inlet connection in accordance with the applicable
legislation.

8.2.4 To fill the water circuit

To fill the water circuit, use a field supply filling kit. Make sure you comply with the
applicable legislation.

NOTICE

Make sure both air purge valves (one on the magnetic filter and one on the backup
heater) are open.
All automatic air purge valves MUST remain open after commissioning.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 79
8 | Piping installation
8.2.5 To protect the water circuit against freezing

About freeze protection

Frost can damage the system. To prevent the hydraulic components from freezing,
the software is equipped with special frost protection functions, that include the
activation of pump in case of low temperatures:
▪ Water pipe freeze prevention (see "Water pipe freeze prevention" [4156]),
▪ Drain prevention. Only applicable when Bivalent is enabled ([C‑02]=1). This
function prevents the opening of freeze protection valves in the water piping to
the outdoor unit when the auxiliary boiler is running at negative outdoor
temperatures.
However, in case of a power failure, these functions cannot guarantee protection.
Do one of the following to protect the water circuit against freezing:
▪ Add glycol to the water. Glycol lowers the freezing point of the water.
▪ Install freeze protection valves. Freeze protection valves drain the water from
the system before it can freeze. Insulate the freeze protection valves in a similar
way as the water piping, but do NOT insulate the inlet and outlet (release) of
these valves.

NOTICE
If you add glycol to the water, do NOT install freeze protection valves. Possible
consequence: Glycol leaking out of the freeze protection valves.

Freeze protection by glycol

About freeze protection by glycol
Adding glycol to the water lowers the freezing point of water.

WARNING
Ethylene glycol is toxic.

WARNING
Due to the presence of glycol, corrosion of the system is possible. Uninhibited glycol
will turn acidic under the influence of oxygen. This process is accelerated by the
presence of copper and high temperatures. The acidic uninhibited glycol attacks
metal surfaces and forms galvanic corrosion cells that cause severe damage to the
system. Therefore it is important that:
▪ the water treatment is correctly executed by a qualified water specialist,
▪ a glycol with corrosion inhibitors is selected to counteract acids formed by the
oxidation of glycols,
▪ no automotive glycol is used because their corrosion inhibitors have a limited
lifetime and contain silicates which can foul or plug the system,
▪ galvanized pipes are NOT used in glycol systems since the presence may lead to
the precipitation of certain components in the glycol's corrosion inhibitor.

NOTICE
Glycol absorbs water from its environment. Therefore do NOT add glycol that has
been exposed to air. Leaving the cap off the glycol container causes the
concentration of water to increase. The glycol concentration is then lower than
assumed. As a result, the hydraulic components might freeze up after all. Take
preventive actions to ensure a minimal exposure of the glycol to air.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
80 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 8 | Piping installation
Types of glycol
The types of glycol that can be used depend on whether the system contains a
domestic hot water tank:
If… Then…
The system contains a domestic hot Only use propylene glycol(a)
water tank
The system does NOT contain a You can use either propylene glycol(a) or
domestic hot water tank ethylene glycol
(a)
Propylene glycol, including the necessary inhibitors, classified as Category III according to
EN1717.

Required concentration of glycol

The required concentration of glycol depends on the lowest expected outdoor
temperature, and on whether you want to protect the system from bursting or
from freezing. To prevent the system from freezing, more glycol is required.
Add glycol according to the table below.
Lowest expected outdoor Prevent from bursting Prevent from freezing
temperature
–5°C 10% 15%
–10°C 15% 25%
–15°C 20% 35%
–20°C 25% —
–25°C 30% —
–30°C 35% —

INFORMATION
▪ Protection against bursting: the glycol will prevent the piping from bursting, but
NOT the liquid inside the piping from freezing.
▪ Protection against freezing: the glycol will prevent the liquid inside the piping
from freezing.

NOTICE
▪ The required concentration might differ depending on the type of glycol. ALWAYS
compare the requirements from the table above with the specifications provided
by the glycol manufacturer. If necessary, meet the requirements set by the glycol
manufacturer.
▪ The added concentration of glycol should NEVER exceed 35%.
▪ If the liquid in the system is frozen, the pump will NOT be able to start. Mind that
if you only prevent the system from bursting, the liquid inside might still freeze.
▪ When water is at standstill inside the system, the system is very likely to freeze
and get damaged.

Glycol and the maximum allowed water volume

Adding glycol to the water circuit reduces the maximum allowed water volume of
the system. For more information, see "Maximum water volume" [474].

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 81
8 | Piping installation
Glycol setting

NOTICE
If glycol is present in the system, setting [E-0D] must be set to 1. If the glycol setting
is NOT set correctly, the liquid inside the piping can freeze.

Freeze protection by freeze protection valves

About freeze protection valves
It is the responsibility of the installer to protect the field piping against freezing.
When no glycol is added to the water, you can use freeze protection valves at all
lowest points of the field piping to drain the water from the system before it can
freeze.
To install freeze protection valves
To protect the field piping against freezing, install the following parts:

b c

a Automatic air intake

b Freeze protection valve (optional – field supply)
c Normally closed valves (recommended – field supply)
Part Description
An automatic air intake (for air supply) should be installed at the
a highest point. For example, an automatic air purge.

Protection for the field piping. The freeze protection valves must
b
be installed:
▪ vertically to allow water to flow out properly and free from
obstructions.
▪ at all lowest points of the field piping.
▪ in the coldest part and away from heat sources.
Note: Leave at least 15 cm clearance from the ground to prevent
ice from blocking the water exit.
Isolation of water inside the house when there is a power
c
interruption. Normally closed valves (located indoors near the
piping entry/exit points) can prevent that all water from indoor
piping is drained when the freeze protection valves open.
▪ When there is a power interruption: The normally closed valves
close and isolate the water inside the house. If the freeze
protection valves open, only the water outside the house is
drained.
▪ In other circumstances (example: when there is a pump failure):
The normally closed valves remain open. If the freeze protection
valves open, the water from inside the house is also drained.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
82 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 8 | Piping installation

NOTICE
When freeze protection valves are installed, set the minimum cooling setpoint
(default=8°C) at least 2°C higher than the maximum opening temperature of the
freeze protection valve. If lower, freeze protection valves can open during cooling
operation.

8.2.6 To fill the domestic hot water tank

See the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.

8.2.7 To insulate the water piping

The piping in the complete water circuit MUST be insulated to prevent
condensation during cooling operation and reduction of the heating and cooling
capacity.
Outdoor water piping insulation

NOTICE
Outside piping. Make sure the outside piping is insulated as instructed to protect
against hazards.

For piping in free air, it is recommended to use the insulation thickness as shown in
below table as a minimum (with λ=0.039 W/mK).
Piping length (m) Minimum insulation thickness (mm)
<20 19
20~30 32
30~40 40
40~50 50
For other cases the minimum insulation thickness can be determined using the
Hydronic Piping Calculation tool.
The Hydronic Piping Calculation tool also calculates the maximum hydronic piping
length from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit based on the emitter pressure drop
or the other way around.
The Hydronic Piping Calculation tool is part of the Heating Solutions Navigator
which can be reached via https://professional.standbyme.daikin.eu.
Please contact your dealer if you have no access to Heating Solutions Navigator.
This recommendation ensures good operation of the unit, however, local
regulations may differ and shall be followed.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 83
9 | Electrical installation

9 Electrical installation
In this chapter
9.1 About connecting the electrical wiring .................................................................................................................................. 84
9.1.1 Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring .............................................................................................. 84
9.1.2 Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring ................................................................................................ 85
9.1.3 About electrical compliance .................................................................................................................................. 86
9.1.4 About preferential kWh rate power supply........................................................................................................... 86
9.1.5 Overview of electrical connections except external actuators............................................................................. 87
9.2 Connections to the outdoor unit............................................................................................................................................ 87
9.2.1 To connect the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit ............................................................................................ 87
9.3 Connections to the indoor unit .............................................................................................................................................. 89
9.3.1 To connect the main power supply ....................................................................................................................... 89
9.3.2 To connect the backup heater power supply........................................................................................................ 90
9.3.3 To connect the shut-off valve ................................................................................................................................ 92
9.3.4 To connect the electricity meters.......................................................................................................................... 93
9.3.5 To connect the domestic hot water pump............................................................................................................ 93
9.3.6 To connect the alarm output ................................................................................................................................. 94
9.3.7 To connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output ........................................................................................ 94
9.3.8 To connect the changeover to external heat source ............................................................................................ 95
9.3.9 To connect the power consumption digital inputs ............................................................................................... 95
9.3.10 To connect the safety thermostat (normally closed contact)............................................................................... 96
9.3.11 To connect a Smart Grid ........................................................................................................................................ 96

9.1 About connecting the electrical wiring

Before connecting the electrical wiring
Make sure the water piping is connected.
Typical workflow
Connecting the electrical wiring typically consists of the following stages:
1 Making sure the power supply system complies with the electrical
specifications of the heat pump.
2 Connecting the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit.
3 Connecting the electrical wiring to the indoor unit.
4 Connecting the main power supply.
5 Connecting the backup heater power supply.
6 Connecting the shut-off valves.
7 Connecting the electrical meters.
8 Connecting the domestic hot water pump.
9 Connecting the alarm output.
10 Connecting the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output.
11 Connecting the changeover to an external heat source.
12 Connecting the power consumption digital inputs.
13 Connecting the safety thermostat.

9.1.1 Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring

INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
84 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 9 | Electrical installation

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

WARNING
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.

9.1.2 Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring

Keep the following in mind:
▪ If stranded conductor wires are used, install a round crimp-style terminal on the
end of the wire. Place the round crimp-style terminal on the wire up to the
covered part and fasten the terminal with the appropriate tool.

b a

a Stranded conductor wire

b Round crimp-style terminal
▪ Use the following methods for installing wires:
Wire type Installation method
Single-core wire cb
AA´
A A´
c

a a

a Curled single-core wire

b Screw
c Flat washer
Stranded conductor wire cb a bc

with round crimp-style B

B
terminal
a

a Terminal
b Screw
c Flat washer
Allowed
NOT allowed

Tightening torques
Outdoor unit:
Item Tightening torque (N•m)
M4 (X1M) 1.2~1.5
M4 (earth)
Indoor unit:

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 85
9 | Electrical installation
Item Tightening torque (N•m)
X1M 2.45 ±10%
X2M 0.88 ±10%
X5M 0.88 ±10%
X6M 2.45 ±10%
X7M, X8M 2.45 ±10%
X10M 0.88 ±10%
M4 (earth) 1.47 ±10%

9.1.3 About electrical compliance

Only for the backup heater of the indoor unit
See "9.3.2 To connect the backup heater power supply" [490].

9.1.4 About preferential kWh rate power supply

Electricity companies throughout the world work hard to provide reliable electric
service at competitive prices and are often authorised to bill clients at benefit
rates. E.g. time-of-use rates, seasonal rates, Wärmepumpentarif in Germany and
Austria, ...
This equipment allows for connection to such preferential kWh rate power supply
delivery systems.
Consult with the electricity company acting as provider at the site where this
equipment is to be installed to know whether it is appropriate to connect the
equipment in one of the preferential kWh rate power supply delivery systems
available, if any.
When the equipment is connected to such preferential kWh rate power supply, the
electricity company is allowed to:
▪ interrupt power supply to the equipment for certain periods of time;
▪ demand that the equipment ONLY consumes a limited amount of electricity
during certain periods of time.
The indoor unit is designed to receive an input signal by which the unit switches
into forced OFF mode. At that moment, the outdoor unit compressor will NOT
operate.
The wiring to the unit is different depending on whether the power supply is
interrupted or NOT.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
86 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 9 | Electrical installation
9.1.5 Overview of electrical connections except external actuators
Normal power supply Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply is NOT Power supply is
interrupted interrupted
a b a b
0 0 58 0 0 58 0 0 58 0 0 58
0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

3 1 3 1 5 3 4 1
4

2 2 2

During preferential kWh During preferential kWh

rate power supply rate power supply
activation, power supply activation, power supply
is NOT interrupted. The is interrupted
outdoor unit is turned off immediately or after
by the control. some time by the
Remark: The electricity electricity company. In
company must always this case, the indoor unit
allow the power must be powered by a
consumption of the separate normal power
indoor unit. supply.

a Normal power supply

b Preferential kWh rate power supply
1 Power supply for outdoor unit
2 Power supply and interconnection cable to indoor unit
3 Power supply for backup heater
4 Preferential kWh rate power supply (voltage free contact)
5 Normal kWh rate power supply (to power the indoor unit PCB in
the event of power supply interruption of the preferential kWh
rate power supply)

9.2 Connections to the outdoor unit

9.2.1 To connect the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit

1 Remove the switch box cover. See "7.2.2 To open the outdoor unit" [462].
2 Strip insulation (20 mm) from the wires.
a b

a Strip wire end to this point

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 87
9 | Electrical installation
b An excessive strip length may cause electrical shock or leakage
3 Insert the wiring at the back of the unit:

a Power supply cable (high voltage)

b Communication cable (high voltage)
c Cable for bottom plate heater (optional)
4 Inside the unit, route the wiring as follows:

d
b
a

e e c
e

a Power supply cable

b Communication cable
c Cable for bottom plate heater (optional)
d Ferrite core
e Tie strap
f Compressor

NOTICE
To guarantee electromagnetic compatibility:
▪ Make sure both power supply and communication cables run parallel to one
another. Use tie straps to hold the cables together.
▪ Make sure the cables are located as far away from the compressor as possible.
▪ The communication cable MUST pass through the ferrite core.

5 Make sure that the cable does NOT come in contact with sharp edges or hot
gas piping.
6 Install the switch box cover.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
88 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 9 | Electrical installation

INFORMATION
When installing field supply or option cables, foresee sufficient cable length. This will
make it possible to remove/reposition the switch box and gain access to other
components during service.

CAUTION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.

9.3 Connections to the indoor unit

9.3.1 To connect the main power supply

1 Connect the main power supply.
In case of normal kWh rate power supply
X11YA X11Y
X11YB

1 2 3
X2M
X1M

X1A
a

123

123

a Interconnection cable (=main power supply)

In case of preferential kWh rate power supply

Connect X11Y to X11YB.
X11YB X11Y
X11YA

1 2 3 56
X2M
X1M

X1A

X5M
9 10

a c b

123 NL

1 2 3 S1S NL

a Interconnection cable (=main power supply)

b Normal kWh rate power supply
c Preferential power supply contact

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 89
9 | Electrical installation
2 Fix the cables with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

INFORMATION
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply, connect X11Y to X11YB. The necessity
of separate normal kWh rate power supply to indoor unit (b) X2M/5+6 depends on
the type of preferential kWh rate power supply.
Separate connection to the indoor unit is required:
▪ if preferential kWh rate power supply is interrupted when active, OR
▪ if no power consumption of the indoor unit is allowed at the preferential kWh
rate power supply when active.

INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is connected to the same terminals
(X5M/9+10) as the safety thermostat. Thus, the system can have EITHER preferential
kWh rate power supply OR a safety thermostat.

9.3.2 To connect the backup heater power supply

WARNING
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply and MUST be protected by
the safety devices required by the applicable legislation.

CAUTION
If the indoor unit has a tank with a built‑in electrical booster heater, use a dedicated
power circuit for the backup heater and booster heater. NEVER use a power circuit
shared by another appliance. This power circuit MUST be protected with the
required safety devices according to the applicable legislation.

CAUTION
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, ALWAYS connect the backup heater
power supply and the earth cable.

The backup heater capacity can vary, depending on the indoor unit model. Make
sure that the power supply is in accordance with the backup heater capacity, as
listed in the table below.
Backup heater Backup Power supply Maximum Zmax
type heater running current
capacity
*6V 2 kW 1N~ 230 V(a) 9A —
4 kW 1N~ 230 V(a) 17 A(b)(c) 0.22 Ω
(a) (b)(c)
6 kW 1N~ 230 V 26 A 0.22 Ω
(d)
2 kW 3~ 230 V 5A —
4 kW 3~ 230 V(d) 10 A —
6 kW 3~ 230 V(d) 15 A —
*9W 3 kW 3N~ 400 V 4A —
6 kW 3N~ 400 V 9A —
9 kW 3N~ 400 V 13 A —
(a)
6V3

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
90 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 9 | Electrical installation
(b)
Electrical equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000-3-12 (European/International Technical
Standard setting the limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to
public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and ≤75 A per phase).
(c)
This equipment complies with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11 (European/International Technical
Standard setting the limits for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public
low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current ≤75 A) provided that the
system impedance Zsys is less than or equal to Zmax at the interface point between the user's
supply and the public system. It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the
equipment to ensure, by consultation with the distribution network operator if necessary,
that the equipment is connected only to a supply with a system impedance Zsys less than or
equal to Zmax.
(d)
6T1

Connect the backup heater power supply as follows:

b
X6M

F1B

Q1DI
a

a Factory-mounted cable connected to the contactor of the backup heater, inside the
switch box (K5M)
b Field wiring (see table below)
Model (power supply) Connections to backup heater power supply
*6V (6V3: 1N~ 230 V) K5M
2 4 6 14
1 3 5 13

BLU2
SWB
BLU1

GRY
BRN

X6M

1 3 5 7

F1B I I I I
2 4 6 8

Q1DI

1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC L N

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 91
9 | Electrical installation
Model (power supply) Connections to backup heater power supply
*6V (6T1: 3~ 230 V) 2 4 6 14
K5M
1 3 5 13

BLU2
SWB

BLU1

GRY
BRN
X6M

1 3 5 7

F1B I I I I
2 4 6 8

Q1DI

3~, 50 Hz
230 V AC L1 L2 L3

*9W (3N~ 400 V) K5M

2 4 6 14
1 3 5 13

BLU
BLK
SWB

GRY
BRN
X6M

1 3 5 7

F1B I I I I
2 4 6 8

Q1DI

3N~, 50 Hz
400 V AC L1 L2 L3 N

F1B Overcurrent fuse (field supply). Recommended fuse: 4‑pole; 20 A; curve 400 V;
tripping class C.
K5M Safety contactor (in the switch box)
Q1DI Earth leakage circuit breaker (field supply)
SWB Switch box
X6M Terminal (field supply)

NOTICE
Do NOT cut or remove the backup heater power supply cable.

9.3.3 To connect the shut-off valve

INFORMATION
Shut-off valve usage example. In case of one LWT zone, and a combination of
underfloor heating and heat pump convectors, install a shut-off valve before the
underfloor heating to prevent condensation on the floor during cooling operation.
For more information, see the installer reference guide.

1 Connect the valve control cable to the appropriate terminals as shown in the
illustration below.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
92 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 9 | Electrical installation

NOTICE
Wiring is different for a NC (normally closed) valve and a NO (normally open) valve.

NO NC

21 28 21 29
X2M X2M
X1M X1M

M2S M2S

2 Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

9.3.4 To connect the electricity meters

INFORMATION
In case of an electricity meter with transistor output, check the polarity. The positive
polarity MUST be connected to X5M/6 and X5M/4; the negative polarity to X5M/5
and X5M/3.

1 Connect the electricity meters cable to the appropriate terminals as shown in

the illustration below.
X5M
3 4 56

S2S S3S

2 Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

9.3.5 To connect the domestic hot water pump

1 Connect the domestic hot water pump cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.

12
X2M
X1M

M2P
M
1~

2 Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 93
9 | Electrical installation
9.3.6 To connect the alarm output
1 Connect the alarm output cable to the appropriate terminals as shown in the
illustration below.

7 9
X2M
X1M

X5M

A4P a
YC Y1 X1M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

a Installation of EKRP1HBAA is required.

2 Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

9.3.7 To connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output

INFORMATION
Cooling is only applicable in case of reversible models.

INFORMATION
Cooling is only applicable in case of:
▪ Reversible models
▪ Heating only models + conversion kit (EKHBCONV*)

1 Connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output cable to the appropriate

terminals as shown in the illustration below.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
94 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 9 | Electrical installation

7 9
X2M
X1M

X5M

A4P a
YC Y2 X1M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

a Installation of EKRP1HBAA is required.

2 Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

9.3.8 To connect the changeover to external heat source

1 Connect the changeover to external heat source cable to the appropriate
terminals as shown in the illustration below.

X2M
X1M

X5M
X1 X2 X3 X4

a
X2M

A4P

X1M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

LN

a Installation of EKRP1HBAA is required.

2 Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

9.3.9 To connect the power consumption digital inputs

1 Connect the power consumption digital inputs cable to the appropriate
terminals as shown in the illustration below.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 95
9 | Electrical installation
X5M

A8P a
X801M
12345

S6S
S7S
S8S
S9S
a Installation of EKRP1AHTA is required.
2 Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

9.3.10 To connect the safety thermostat (normally closed contact)

1 Connect the safety thermostat (normally closed) cable to the appropriate
terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X5M
9 10

2 Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.

NOTICE
Make sure to select and install the safety thermostat according to the applicable
legislation.
In any case, to prevent unnecessary tripping of the safety thermostat, we
recommend the following:
▪ The safety thermostat is automatically resettable.
▪ The safety thermostat has a maximum temperature variation rate of 2°C/min.
▪ There is a minimum distance of 2 m between the safety thermostat and the
motorized 3‑way valve delivered with the domestic hot water tank.

INFORMATION
ALWAYS configure the safety thermostat after it is installed. Without configuration,
the unit will ignore the safety thermostat contact.

INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is connected to the same terminals
(X5M/9+10) as the safety thermostat. Thus, the system can have EITHER preferential
kWh rate power supply OR a safety thermostat.

9.3.11 To connect a Smart Grid

This topic describes 2 possible ways to connect the indoor unit to a Smart Grid:
▪ In case of low voltage Smart Grid contacts
▪ In case of high voltage Smart Grid contacts. This requires the installation of the
Smart Grid relay kit (EKRELSG).
Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)
Daikin Altherma 3 H W
96 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 9 | Electrical installation
The 2 incoming Smart Grid contacts can activate the following Smart Grid modes:
Smart Grid contact Smart Grid operation mode
1 2

0 0 Free running
0 1 Forced off
1 0 Recommended on
1 1 Forced on
The use of a Smart Grid pulse meter is not mandatory:
If Smart Grid pulse meter is… Then [9.8.8] Limit setting kW is…
Used Not applicable
([9.A.2] Electricity meter 2 ≠
None)
Not used Applicable
([9.A.2] Electricity meter 2 =
None)

In case of low voltage Smart Grid contacts

The wiring of the Smart Grid in case of low voltage contacts is as follows:
X5M
3 4 5 6 9 10 13 14

2 1 a

S4S S11S S10S

a Jumper (factory-mounted). If you also connect a safety thermostat (Q4L), replace

the jumper with the safety thermostat wires.
S4S Smart Grid pulse meter
1 /S10S Low voltage Smart Grid contact 1
2 /S11S Low voltage Smart Grid contact 2

1 Connect the wiring as follows:

2 Fix the cables with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
In case of high voltage Smart Grid contacts
The wiring of the Smart Grid in case of high voltage contacts is as follows:

X5M X5M
X10M 1 2 3 4 10 9 6 5 14 13 4 3
A1 A1
A2 A2
NL N L K1A K2A K1A K2A S4S
2 1 a b c d e f
STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2

STEP 1 Smart Grid relay kit installation

STEP 2 Low voltage connections
STEP 3 High voltage connections
1 High voltage Smart Grid contact 1
2 High voltage Smart Grid contact 2
a, b Coil sides of relays
c, d Contact sides of relays
e Jumper (factory-mounted). If you also connect a safety thermostat (Q4L), replace
the jumper with the safety thermostat wires.
f Smart Grid pulse meter
1 Install the components of the Smart Grid relay kit as follows:

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 97
9 | Electrical installation

d
a
×2

b K1A K2A
×4
e
c
X10M

K1A, K2A Relays

X10M Terminal block
a Screws for X10M
b Screws for K1A and K2A
c Sticker to put on the high voltage wires
d Wires between the relays and X5M (AWG22 ORG)
e Wires between the relays and X10M (AWG18 RED)
2 Connect the low voltage wiring as follows:
3 Connect the high voltage wiring as follows:
4 Fix the cables with cable ties to the cable tie mountings. If necessary, bundle
excessive cable length with a cable tie.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
98 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration

10 Configuration
INFORMATION
Cooling is only applicable in case of reversible models.

In this chapter
10.1 Overview: Configuration......................................................................................................................................................... 99
10.1.1 To access the most used commands ..................................................................................................................... 100
10.2 Configuration wizard .............................................................................................................................................................. 102
10.3 Possible screens...................................................................................................................................................................... 103
10.3.1 Possible screens: Overview.................................................................................................................................... 103
10.3.2 Home screen .......................................................................................................................................................... 104
10.3.3 Main menu screen ................................................................................................................................................. 106
10.3.4 Menu screen........................................................................................................................................................... 107
10.3.5 Setpoint screen ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
10.3.6 Detailed screen with values ................................................................................................................................... 108
10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example ..................................................................................................................................... 108
10.4 Weather-dependent curve..................................................................................................................................................... 113
10.4.1 What is a weather-dependent curve? ................................................................................................................... 113
10.4.2 2-points curve......................................................................................................................................................... 113
10.4.3 Slope-offset curve .................................................................................................................................................. 114
10.4.4 Using weather-dependent curves ......................................................................................................................... 116
10.5 Settings menu ......................................................................................................................................................................... 118
10.5.1 Malfunctioning ....................................................................................................................................................... 118
10.5.2 Room ...................................................................................................................................................................... 118
10.5.3 Main zone............................................................................................................................................................... 121
10.5.4 Additional zone ...................................................................................................................................................... 130
10.5.5 Space heating/cooling............................................................................................................................................ 134
10.5.6 Tank ........................................................................................................................................................................ 142
10.5.7 User settings........................................................................................................................................................... 143
10.5.8 Information............................................................................................................................................................. 147
10.5.9 Installer settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 148
10.5.10 Commissioning ....................................................................................................................................................... 166
10.5.11 User profile............................................................................................................................................................. 166
10.5.12 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................... 166
10.6 Menu structure: Overview user settings................................................................................................................................ 167
10.7 Menu structure: Overview installer settings.......................................................................................................................... 168

10.1 Overview: Configuration

This chapter describes what you have to do and know to configure the system after
it is installed.
Why
If you do NOT configure the system correctly, it might NOT work as expected. The
configuration influences the following:
▪ The calculations of the software
▪ What you can see on and do with the user interface
How
You can configure the system via the user interface.
▪ First time – Configuration wizard. When you turn ON the user interface for the
first time (via the unit), the configuration wizard starts to help you configure the
system.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 99
10 | Configuration
▪ Restart the configuration wizard. If the system is already configured, you can
restart the configuration wizard. To restart the configuration wizard, go to
Installer settings > Configuration wizard. To access Installer
settings, see "10.1.1 To access the most used commands" [4100].
▪ Afterwards. If necessary, you can make changes to the configuration in the
menu structure or the overview settings.

INFORMATION
When the configuration wizard is finished, the user interface will show an overview
screen and request to confirm. When confirmed, the system will restart and the
home screen will be displayed.

Accessing settings – Legend for tables

You can access the installer settings using two different methods. However, NOT all
settings are accessible via both methods. If so, the corresponding table columns in
this chapter are set to N/A (not applicable).
Method Column in tables
Accessing settings via the breadcrumb in the home #
menu screen or the menu structure. To enable For example: [2.9]
breadcrumbs, press the button in the home screen.
Accessing settings via the code in the overview field Code
settings. For example: [C-07]
See also:
▪ "To access the installer settings" [4101]
▪ "10.7 Menu structure: Overview installer settings" [4168]

10.1.1 To access the most used commands

To change the user permission level
You can change the user permission level as follows:
1 Go to [B]: User profile.
B

User profile

2 Enter the applicable pin code for the user permission level. —
▪ Browse through the list of digits and change the selected digit.
▪ Move the cursor from left to right.
▪ Confirm the pin code and proceed.

Installer pin code

The Installer pin code is 5678. Additional menu items and installer settings are
now available.
Installer

5678
Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)
Daikin Altherma 3 H W
100 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Advanced user pin code
The Advanced user pin code is 1234. Additional menu items for the user are
now visible.
Advanced user

1234
User pin code
The User pin code is 0000.
User

0000
To access the installer settings
1 Set the user permission level to Installer.
2 Go to [9]: Installer settings.
To modify an overview setting
Example: Modify [1‑01] from 15 to 20.
Most settings can be configured via the menu structure. If for any reason it is
required to change a setting using the overview settings, then the overview
settings can be accessed as follows:
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To change —
the user permission level" [4100].
2 Go to [9.I]: Installer settings > Overview field
settings.
3 Turn the left dial to select the first part of the setting and
confirm by pressing the dial.
00 05 0A
0 01 06 0B
1 02 07 0C
2 03 08 0D
3 04 09 0E

4 Turn the left dial to select the second part of the setting
00 05 0A
01 15 06 0B
1 02 07 0C
03 08 0D
04 09 0E

5 Turn the right dial to modify the value from 15 to 20.

00 05 0A
01 20 06 0B
1 02 07 0C
03 08 0D
04 09 0E

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 101
10 | Configuration
6 Press the left dial to confirm the new setting.
7 Press the center button to go back to the home screen.

INFORMATION
When you change the overview settings and you go back to the home screen, the
user interface will show a popup screen and request to restart the system.
When confirmed, the system will restart and recent changes will be applied.

10.2 Configuration wizard

After first power ON of the system, the user interface will guide you using the
configuration wizard. This way you can set the most important initial settings. This
way the unit will be able to run properly. Afterwards, more detailed settings can be
done via the menu structure if required.
You can find a short overview of the settings in the configuration here. All the
settings can also be adjusted in the settings menu (use the breadcrumbs).
For the setting… Refer to…
Language [7.1]
Time/date [7.2]
Hours —
Minutes
Year
Month
Day
System
Indoor unit type (read only) "10.5.9 Installer settings" [4148]
Backup heater type [9.3.1]
Domestic hot water [9.2.1]
Emergency [9.5.1]
Number of zones [4.4] "10.5.5 Space heating/
cooling" [4134]
Backup heater
Voltage [9.3.2] "Backup heater" [4150]
Configuration [9.3.3]
Capacity step 1 [9.3.4]
Additional capacity step 2
[9.3.5] (if applicable)
Main zone

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
102 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
For the setting… Refer to…
Emitter type [2.7] "10.5.3 Main zone" [4121]
Control [2.9]
Setpoint mode [2.4]
Heating WD curve [2.5] (if
applicable)
Cooling WD curve [2.6] (if
applicable)
Schedule [2.1]
Additional zone (only if [4.4]=1)
Emitter type [3.7] "10.5.4 Additional zone" [4130]
Control (read only) [3.9]
Setpoint mode [3.4]
Heating WD curve [3.5] (if
applicable)
Cooling WD curve [3.6] (if
applicable)
Schedule [3.1]
Tank
Heat up mode [5.6] "10.5.6 Tank" [4142]
Comfort setpoint [5.2]
Eco setpoint [5.3]
Reheat setpoint [5.4]

10.3 Possible screens

10.3.1 Possible screens: Overview

The most common screens are as follows:

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 103
10 | Configuration

OR

c1 c2

c3 c4

a Home screen
b Main menu screen
c Lower level screens:
c1: Setpoint screen
c2: Detailed screen with values
c3: Screen with weather-dependent curve
c4: Screen with schedule

10.3.2 Home screen

Press the button to go back to the home screen. You see an overview of the unit
configuration and the room and setpoint temperatures. Only symbols applicable
for your configuration are visible on the home screen.
j 18 Feb 2018
e
22:19

i 55 d

h c
45 b
1.6 6
21 bar
g a
35
f

Possible actions on this screen

Go through the list of the main menu.
Go to the main menu screen.
Enable/disable breadcrumbs.

Item Description
21 21 The temperatures are shown in circles. If the circle is grey,
the corresponding operation (example: space heating) is
currently not active.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
104 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Item Description
Outdoor unit a1 : Outdoor unit
a2 a3
a2 : Quiet mode active
a1
a3 Measured ambient temperature
Indoor unit / b1 Indoor unit:
domestic hot
water tank
▪ : Floor-standing indoor unit with integrated tank
b2
b1
▪ : Wall-mounted indoor unit with separated tank

▪ : Wall-mounted indoor unit

b2 Water pressure
Space c ▪ : Cooling
operation ▪ : Heating
mode
Disinfection / d ▪ : Disinfection mode active
Powerful ▪ : Powerful operation active
Date / time e Current date and time
Holiday f : Holiday mode active
Main zone g1 Heat emitter type:
g3 g4 ▪ : Underfloor heating
g1 g2
▪ : Fancoil unit
▪ : Radiator
g2 Leaving water temperature setpoint
g3 Room thermostat type:
▪ : Daikin user interface used as room thermostat
▪ : External control
▪ Hidden: Leaving water temperature control
g4 Measured room temperature
Additional h1 Heat emitter type:
zone ▪ : Underfloor heating
h3
h1 h2
▪ : Fancoil unit
▪ : Radiator
h2 Leaving water temperature setpoint
h3 Room thermostat type:
▪ : External control
▪ Hidden: Leaving water temperature control
Domestic hot i1
: Domestic hot water
water
i1 i2 i2 Measured tank temperature

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 105
10 | Configuration
Item Description
Malfunction j or : A malfunction occurred
See "14.4.1 To display the help text in case of a
malfunction" [4191] for more information.

10.3.3 Main menu screen

Starting from the home screen, press ( ) or turn ( ) the left dial to open
the main menu screen. From the main menu, you can access the different setpoint
screens and submenus.
2
Malfunctioning

Room

Main zone a
Additional zone
Space heating/cooling

a Selected submenu
Possible actions on this screen
Go through the list.
Enter the submenu.
Enable/disable breadcrumbs.
Submenu Description
[0] or Malfunctioning Restriction: Only displayed if a malfunction
occurs.
See "14.4.1 To display the help text in case of
a malfunction" [4191] for more information.
[1] Room Restriction: Only displayed if a room
thermostat is connected to the indoor unit.
Set the room temperature.
[2] Main zone Shows the applicable symbol for your main
zone emitter type.
Set the leaving water temperature for the
main zone.
[3] Additional zone Restriction: Only displayed if there are two
leaving water temperature zones. Shows the
applicable symbol for your additional zone
emitter type.
Set the leaving water temperature for the
additional zone (if present).
[4] Space heating/ Shows the applicable symbol for your unit.
cooling Put the unit in heating mode or cooling mode.
You cannot change the mode on heating only
models.
[5] Tank Restriction: Only displayed if a domestic hot
water tank is present.
Set the domestic hot water tank temperature.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
106 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Submenu Description
[7] User settings Gives access to user settings such as holiday
mode and quiet mode.
[8] Information Displays data and information about the
indoor unit.
[9] Installer settings Restriction: Only for the installer.
Gives access to advanced settings.
[A] Commissioning Restriction: Only for the installer.
Perform tests and maintenance.
[B] User profile Change the active user profile.
[C] Operation Turn heating/cooling functionality and
domestic hot water preparation on or off.

10.3.4 Menu screen

Example:
7.1

Language
Time/date

Holiday

Possible actions on this screen

Go through the list.
Enter the submenu/setting.

10.3.5 Setpoint screen

The setpoint screen is displayed for screens describing system components that
need a setpoint value.
Examples
[1] Room temperature screen [2] Main zone screen
1 2

+ +

21 °C – 35 °C –
Room Main zone

[3] Additional zone screen [5] Tank temperature screen

3 5

+ +

45 °C – 50 °C –
Additional zone Tank

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 107
10 | Configuration
Explanation
d
a2 c +
b2
e d d
e –
a1 b1

Possible actions on this screen

Go through the list of the submenu.
Go to the submenu.
Adjust and automatically apply the desired temperature.

Item Description
Minimum temperature limit a1 Fixed by the unit
a2 Restricted by the installer
Maximum temperature limit b1 Fixed by the unit
b2 Restricted by the installer
Current temperature c Measured by the unit
Desired temperature d Turn the right dial to increase/
decrease.
Submenu e Turn or press the left dial to go to
the submenu.

10.3.6 Detailed screen with values

Example:
7.2.1 Time/date

Hours 11

Minutes 30

a c b a c b

a Settings
b Values
c Selected setting and value
Possible actions on this screen
Go through the list of settings.
Change the value.
Go to the next setting.
Confirm changes and proceed.

10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example

This example shows how to set a room temperature schedule in heating mode for
the main zone.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
108 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration

INFORMATION
The procedures to program other schedules are similar.

To program the schedule: overview

Example: You want to program the following schedule:
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

Prerequisite: The room temperature schedule is only available if room thermostat

control is active. If leaving water temperature control is active, you can program
the main zone schedule instead.
1 Go to the schedule.
2 (optional) Clear the content of the whole week schedule or the content of a
selected day schedule.
3 Program the schedule for Monday.
4 Copy the schedule to the other weekdays.
5 Program the schedule for Saturday and copy it to Sunday.
6 Give the schedule a name.
To go to the schedule
1 Go to [1.1]: Room > Schedule.
2 Set scheduling to Yes.
3 Go to [1.2]: Room > Heating schedule.

To clear the content of the week schedule

1 Select the name of the current schedule.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

2 Select Delete.

Delete
Rename
Select

3 Select OK to confirm.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 109
10 | Configuration
To clear the content of a day schedule
1 Select the day of which you want to clear the content. For
example Friday
User defined 1
Mon C
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

2 Select Delete.

Delete
Edit
Copy

3 Select OK to confirm.

To program the schedule for Monday

1 Select Monday.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

2 Select Edit.

Delete
Edit
Copy

3 Use the left dial to select an entry and edit the entry with the
right dial. You can program up to 6 actions each day. On the
bar, a high temperature has a darker colour than a low
temperature.
Mon
0 12 24
6:00 20°C 22:00 18°C
8:30 18°C --:-- --
17:30 21°C

Note: To clear an action, set its time as the time of the previous
action.
4 Confirm the changes.
Result: The schedule for Monday is defined. The value of the
last action is valid until the next programmed action. In this
example, Monday is the first day you programmed. Thus, the
last programmed action is valid up to the first action of next
Monday.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
110 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
To copy the schedule to the other weekdays
1 Select Monday.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

2 Select Copy.

Delete
Edit
Copy

Result: Next to the copied day, "C" is displayed.

3 Select Tuesday.
User defined 1
Mon C
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

4 Select Paste.

Delete
Edit
Copy
Paste

Result:
User defined 1
Mon C
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

5 Repeat this action for all other weekdays. —

User defined 1
Mon C
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

To program the schedule for Saturday and copy it to Sunday

1 Select Saturday.
2 Select Edit.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 111
10 | Configuration
3 Use the left dial to select an entry and edit the entry with the
right dial.
Sat
0 12 24
8:00 21°C
23:00 18°C
--:-- --

4 Confirm the changes.

5 Select Saturday.
6 Select Copy.
7 Select Sunday.
8 Select Paste.
Result:
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat C
Sun

To rename the schedule

1 Select the name of the current schedule.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun

2 Select Rename.

Delete
Rename
Select

3 (optional) To delete the current schedule name, browse

through the character list until ← is displayed, then press to
remove the previous character. Repeat for each character of
the schedule name.
4 To name the current schedule, browse through the character
list and confirm the selected character. The schedule name can
contain up to 15 characters.
5 Confirm the new name.

INFORMATION
Not all schedules can be renamed.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
112 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration

10.4 Weather-dependent curve

10.4.1 What is a weather-dependent curve?

Weather-dependent operation
The unit operates 'weather dependent' if the desired leaving water or tank
temperature is determined automatically by the outdoor temperature. It therefore
is connected to a temperature sensor on the North wall of the building. If the
outdoor temperature drops or rises, the unit compensates instantly. Thus, the unit
does not have to wait for feedback by the thermostat to increase or decrease the
temperature of the leaving water or tank. Because it reacts more quickly, it
prevents high rises and drops of the indoor temperature and water temperature at
tap points.
Advantage
Weather-dependent operation reduces energy consumption.
Weather-dependent curve
To be able to compensate for differences in temperature, the unit relies on its
weather-dependent curve. This curve defines how much the temperature of the
tank or leaving water must be at different outdoor temperatures. Because the
slope of the curve depends on local circumstances such as climate and the
insulation of the house, the curve can be adjusted by an installer or user.
Types of weather-dependent curve
There are 2 types of weather-dependent curves:
▪ 2-points curve
▪ Slope-offset curve
Which type of curve you use to make adjustments, depends on your personal
preference. See "10.4.4 Using weather-dependent curves" [4116].
Availability
The weather-dependent curve is available for:
▪ Main zone - Heating
▪ Main zone - Cooling
▪ Additional zone - Heating
▪ Additional zone - Cooling
▪ Tank (only available to installers)

INFORMATION
To operate weather dependent, correctly configure the setpoint of the main zone,
additional zone or tank. See "10.4.4 Using weather-dependent curves" 4
[ 116].

10.4.2 2-points curve

Define the weather-dependent curve with these two setpoints:
▪ Setpoint (X1, Y2)
▪ Setpoint (X2, Y1)

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 113
10 | Configuration
Example

Y2

Y1

X1 X2

Item Description
a Selected weather dependent zone:
▪ : Main zone or additional zone heating
▪ : Main zone or additional zone cooling
▪ : Domestic hot water
X1, X2 Examples of outdoor ambient temperature
Y1, Y2 Examples of desired tank temperature or leaving water temperature.
The icon corresponds to the heat emitter for that zone:
▪ : Underfloor heating
▪ : Fan coil unit
▪ : Radiator

▪ : Domestic hot water tank

Possible actions on this screen
Go through the temperatures.
Change the temperature.
Go to the next temperature.
Confirm changes and proceed.

10.4.3 Slope-offset curve

Slope and offset
Define the weather-dependent curve by its slope and offset:
▪ Change the slope to differently increase or decrease the temperature of the
leaving water for different ambient temperatures. For example, if leaving water
temperature is in general fine but at low ambient temperatures too cold, raise
the slope so that leaving water temperature is heated increasingly more at
decreasingly lower ambient temperatures.
▪ Change the offset to equally increase or decrease the temperature of the leaving
water for different ambient temperatures. For example, if leaving water
temperature is always a bit too cold at different ambient temperatures, shift the
offset up to equally increase the leaving water temperature for all ambient
temperatures.
Examples
Weather-dependent curve when slope is selected:

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
114 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
c
a b e
d
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1

X1 X2

Weather-dependent curve when offset is selected:

c
a b e
d

Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1

X1 X2

Item Description
a WD curve before changes.
b WD curve after changes (as example):
▪ When slope is changed, the new preferred temperature at X1 is
unequally higher than the preferred temperature at X2.
▪ When offset is changed, the new preferred temperature at X1 is
equally higher as the preferred temperature at X2.
c Slope
d Offset
e Selected weather dependent zone:
▪ : Main zone or additional zone heating
▪ : Main zone or additional zone cooling
▪ : Domestic hot water
X1, X2 Examples of outdoor ambient temperature
Y1, Y2, Y3, Examples of desired tank temperature or leaving water
Y4 temperature. The icon corresponds to the heat emitter for that
zone:
▪ : Underfloor heating
▪ : Fan coil unit
▪ : Radiator

▪ : Domestic hot water tank

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 115
10 | Configuration
Possible actions on this screen
Select slope or offset.
Increase or decrease the slope/offset.
When slope is selected: set slope and go to offset.
When offset is selected: set offset.
Confirm changes and return to the submenu.

10.4.4 Using weather-dependent curves

Configure weather-dependent curves as following:
To define the setpoint mode
To use the weather-dependent curve, you need to define the correct setpoint
mode:
Go to setpoint mode … Set the setpoint mode to …
Main zone – Heating
[2.4] Main zone > Setpoint mode WD heating, fixed cooling OR
Weather dependent
Main zone – Cooling
[2.4] Main zone > Setpoint mode Weather dependent
Additional zone – Heating
[3.4] Additional zone > Setpoint WD heating, fixed cooling OR
mode Weather dependent
Additional zone – Cooling
[3.4] Additional zone > Setpoint Weather dependent
mode
Tank
[5.B] Tank > Setpoint mode Restriction: Only available to installers.
Weather dependent

To change the type of weather-dependent curve

To change the type for all zones (main + additional) and for the tank, go to [2.E]
Main zone > WD curve type.
Viewing which type is selected is also possible via:
▪ [3.C] Additional zone > WD curve type
▪ [5.E] Tank > WD curve type
Restriction: Only available to installers.
To change the weather-dependent curve
Zone Go to …
Main zone – Heating [2.5] Main zone > Heating WD
curve
Main zone – Cooling [2.6] Main zone > Cooling WD
curve

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
116 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Zone Go to …
Additional zone – Heating [3.5] Additional zone > Heating
WD curve
Additional zone – Cooling [3.6] Additional zone > Cooling
WD curve
Tank Restriction: Only available to installers.
[5.C] Tank > WD curve

INFORMATION
Maximum and minimum setpoints
You cannot configure the curve with temperatures that are higher or lower than the
set maximum and minimum setpoints for that zone or for the tank. When the
maximum or minimum setpoint is reached, the curve flattens out.

To fine-tune the weather-dependent curve: slope-offset curve

The following table describes how to fine-tune the weather-dependent curve of a
zone or tank:
You feel … Fine-tune with slope and
offset:
At regular outdoor At cold outdoor Slope Offset
temperatures … temperatures …
OK Cold ↑ —
OK Hot ↓ —
Cold OK ↓ ↑
Cold Cold — ↑
Cold Hot ↓ ↑
Hot OK ↑ ↓
Hot Cold ↑ ↓
Hot Hot — ↓

To fine-tune the weather-dependent curve: 2-points curve

The following table describes how to fine-tune the weather-dependent curve of a
zone or tank:
You feel … Fine-tune with setpoints:
At regular outdoor At cold outdoor Y2(a) Y1(a) X1(a) X2(a)
temperatures … temperatures …
OK Cold ↑ — ↑ —
OK Hot ↓ — ↓ —
Cold OK — ↑ — ↑
Cold Cold ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
Cold Hot ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑
Hot OK — ↓ — ↓
Hot Cold ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓
Hot Hot ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 117
10 | Configuration
(a)
See "10.4.2 2-points curve" 4
[ 113].

10.5 Settings menu

You can set additional settings using the main menu screen and its submenus. The
most important settings are presented here.

10.5.1 Malfunctioning
In case of a malfunction, or will appear on the home screen. To display the
error code, open the menu screen and go to [0] Malfunctioning. Press for
more information about the error.
0
User profile

Operation

Malfunctioning

Room
Main zone

10.5.2 Room
Setpoint screen
Control the room temperature of the main zone via setpoint screen [1] Room.
See "10.3.5 Setpoint screen" [4107].
Schedule
Indicate if the room temperature is controlled according to a schedule or not.
# Code Description
[1.1] N/A Schedule:
▪ No: Room temperature is directly controlled by
the user.
▪ Yes: Room temperature is controlled by a
schedule and can be modified by the user.

Heating schedule
Applicable for all models.
Define a heating schedule of the room temperature in [1.2] Heating schedule .
See "10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example" [4108].
Cooling schedule
Only applicable for reversible models.
Define a cooling schedule of the room temperature in [1.3] Cooling schedule.
See "10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example" [4108].
Antifrost
Room frost protection [1.4] prevents the room from getting too cold. This setting
behaves differently depending on the set unit control method [2.9]. Perform
actions according to the table below.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
118 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Main zone unit control method [2.9] Description
Leaving water temperature control Room frost protection is NOT guaranteed.
([C‑07]=0)
External room thermostat control Allow for the external room thermostat to
([C‑07]=1) take care of room frost protection:
▪ Set [C.2] Space heating/
cooling=On.
Room thermostat control Allow for the user interface used as room
([C‑07]=2) thermostat to take care of room frost
protection:
▪ Set antifrost [1.4.1] Activation=Yes.
▪ Set the temperature of the antifrost
function in [1.4.2] Room setpoint.

INFORMATION
If a U4 error occurs, room frost protection is NOT guaranteed.

NOTICE
Room frost protection. Even if you turn OFF space heating/cooling operation ([C.2]:
Operation > Space heating/cooling), room frost protection operation –if
enabled– can still activate. However, for leaving water temperature control and
external room thermostat control, the protection is NOT guaranteed.

For more detailed information about room frost protection in relation to the
applicable unit control method, see the sections below.
Leaving water temperature control ([C‑07]=0)
Under leaving water temperature control, room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed. However, if room antifrost [1.4] is activated, limited frost protection
by the unit is possible:
If... Then...
Space heating/cooling is OFF and The unit will supply leaving water to the
the outdoor ambient temperature heat emitters to heat up the room
drops below 4°C again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON and The unit will supply leaving water to the
the operation mode is "heating" heat emitters to heat up the room
according to normal logic.
Space heating/cooling is ON and There is no room frost protection.
the operation mode is "cooling"
External room thermostat control ([C‑07]=1)
Under external room thermostat control, room frost protection is guaranteed by
the external room thermostat, provided that Space heating/cooling [C.2] is
turned ON and the emergency setting [9.5] is set to automatic.
In case of one leaving water temperature zone:

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 119
10 | Configuration
If... Then...
Space heating/cooling is OFF and The unit will supply leaving water to the
the outdoor ambient temperature heat emitters to heat up the room
drops below 4°C again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON, the The unit will supply leaving water to the
external room thermostat is "Thermo heat emitters to heat up the room
OFF" and the outdoor temperature again, and the leaving water
drops below 4°C temperature setpoint will be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON and Room frost protection is guaranteed by
the external room thermostat is the normal logic.
"Thermo ON"
In case of two leaving water temperature zones:
If... Then...
Space heating/cooling is OFF and The unit will supply leaving water to the
the outdoor ambient temperature heat emitters to heat up the room
drops below 4°C again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON, the The unit will supply leaving water to the
external room thermostat is "Thermo heat emitters to heat up the room
OFF", the operation mode is "heating" again, and the leaving water
and the outdoor temperature drops temperature setpoint will be lowered.
below 4°C
Space heating/cooling is ON and There is no room frost protection.
the operation mode is "cooling"
Room thermostat control ([C‑07]=2)
During room thermostat control, room frost protection [2‑06] is guaranteed when
activated. If so, and the room temperature drops below the room antifrost
temperature [2‑05], the unit will supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat
up the room again.
# Code Description
[1.4.1] [2-06] Activation:
▪ 0 No: Antifrost functionality is OFF.
▪ 1 Yes: Antifrost functionality is on.
[1.4.2] [2-05] Room setpoint:
▪ 4°C~16°C

INFORMATION
When the user interface used as room thermostat is disconnected (because of
incorrect wiring or damage of the cable), then room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
120 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration

NOTICE
If Emergency is set to Manual ([9.5]=0), and the unit is triggered to start emergency
operation, the unit will stop and need to be recovered manually via the user
interface. To recover operation manually, go to the Malfunctioning main menu
screen, where the user interface will then ask you to confirm emergency operation
before starting.
Room frost protection is active even if the user does NOT confirm emergency
operation.

Setpoint range
Only applicable in room thermostat control.
To save energy by preventing overheating or undercooling the room, you can limit
the range of the room temperature for heating and/or cooling.

NOTICE
When adjusting the room temperature ranges, all desired room temperatures are
also adjusted to guarantee they are between the limits.

# Code Description
[1.5.1] [3-07] Heating minimum
[1.5.2] [3-06] Heating maximum
[1.5.3] [3-09] Cooling minimum
[1.5.4] [3-08] Cooling maximum

Room sensor offset

Only applicable in room thermostat control.
To calibrate the (external) room temperature sensor, give an offset to the value of
the room thermistor as measured by the user interface used as room thermostat
or by the external room sensor. The setting can be used to compensate for
situations where the user interface used as room thermostat or the external room
sensor cannot be installed at the ideal location.
See "6.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor" [456]).
# Code Description
[1.6] [2-0A] Room sensor offset (user interface used as
room thermostat): Offset on the actual room
temperature measured by the user interface
used as room thermostat.
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C
[1.7] [2-09] Room sensor offset (external room sensor
option): Only applicable if the external room
sensor option is installed and configured.
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C

10.5.3 Main zone

Setpoint screen
Control the leaving water temperature for the main zone via setpoint screen [2]
Main zone.
See "10.3.5 Setpoint screen" [4107].
EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 121
10 | Configuration
Schedule
Indicate if the temperature of the leaving water is defined according to a schedule
or not.
Influence of the LWT setpoint mode [2.4] is as follows:
▪ In Fixed LWT setpoint mode, the scheduled actions consist of desired leaving
water temperatures, either preset or custom.
▪ In Weather dependent LWT setpoint mode, the scheduled actions consist of
desired shift actions, either preset or custom.
# Code Description
[2.1] N/A Schedule:
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes

Heating schedule
Define a heating temperature schedule for the main zone via [2.2] Heating
schedule.
See "10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example" [4108].
Cooling schedule
Define a cooling temperature schedule for the main zone via [2.3] Cooling
schedule.
See "10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example" [4108].
Setpoint mode
Define the setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed: the desired leaving water temperature does not depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature.
▪ In WD heating, fixed cooling mode, the desired leaving water
temperature:
- depends on the outdoor ambient temperature for heating
- does NOT depend on the outdoor ambient temperature for cooling
▪ In Weather dependent mode, the desired leaving water temperature depends
on the outdoor ambient temperature.
# Code Description
[2.4] N/A Setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed
▪ WD heating, fixed cooling
▪ Weather dependent
When weather dependent operation is active, low outdoor temperatures will result
in warmer water and vice versa. During weather dependent operation, the user
can shift the water temperature up or down by a maximum of 10°C.
Heating WD curve
Set weather-dependent heating for the main zone (if [2.4]=1 or 2):

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
122 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[2.5] [1-00] Set weather-dependent heating in [2.5] Heating
[1-01] WD curve:
Tt
[1-02]
[1-03] [1-02]

[1-03]

[1-00] [1-01] Ta

Tt Target leaving water temperature (main zone)

Ta Outdoor temperature
Set weather-dependent heating in [9.l]
Overview field settings:
▪ [1-00]: Low outdoor ambient temperature. –
40°C~+5°C
▪ [1-01]: High outdoor ambient temperature.
10°C~25°C
▪ [1-02]: Desired leaving water temperature
when the outdoor temperature equals or drops
below the low ambient temperature.
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C
Note: This value should be higher than [1‑03]
as for low outdoor temperatures warmer water
is required.
▪ [1-03]: Desired leaving water temperature
when the outdoor temperature equals or rises
above the high ambient temperature.
[9‑01]°C~min(45, [9‑00])°C
Note: This value should be lower than [1‑02] as
for high outdoor temperatures less warm water
is required.

Cooling WD curve
Set weather-dependent cooling for the main zone (if [2.4]=2):

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 123
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[2.6] [1-06] Set weather-dependent cooling in [2.6] Cooling
[1-07] WD curve:
Tt
[1-08]
[1-09] [1-08]

[1-09]

[1-06] [1-07] Ta

Tt Target leaving water temperature (main zone)

Ta Outdoor temperature
Set weather-dependent heating in [9.l]
Overview field settings:
▪ [1-06]: Low outdoor ambient temperature.
10°C~25°C
▪ [1-07]: High outdoor ambient temperature.
25°C~43°C
▪ [1-08]: Desired leaving water temperature
when the outdoor temperature equals or drops
below the low ambient temperature.
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C
Note: This value should be higher than [1‑09]
as for low outdoor temperatures less cold
water is required.
▪ [1-09]: Desired leaving water temperature
when the outdoor temperature equals or rises
above the high ambient temperature.
[9‑03]°C~[9-02]°C
Note: This value should be lower than [1‑08] as
for high outdoor temperatures colder water is
required.

Emitter type
Heating up or cooling down the main zone can take longer. This depends on:
▪ The water volume of the system
▪ The heater emitter type of the main zone
The setting Emitter type can compensate for a slow or a quick heating/cooling
system during the heat up/cool down cycle. In room thermostat control, Emitter
type influences the maximum modulation of the desired leaving water
temperature, and the possibility for usage of the automatic cooling/heating
changeover based on the indoor ambient temperature.
It is important to set Emitter type correctly and in accordance with your system
layout. The target delta T for the main zone depends on it.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
124 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[2.7] [2‑0C] Emitter type:
▪ 0: Underfloor heating
▪ 1: Fancoil unit
▪ 2: Radiator
The setting Emitter type influences the space heating setpoint range and the
target delta T in heating as follows:
Emitter type Main Space heating setpoint Target delta T in heating
zone range [9‑01]~[9‑00] [1‑0B]
0: Underfloor Maximum 55°C Variable (see [2.B.1])
heating
1: Fancoil unit Maximum 55°C Variable (see [2.B.1])
2: Radiator Maximum 60°C Fixed 8°C

NOTICE
The maximum setpoint in space heating depends on the emitter type as can be seen
in above table. If there are 2 water temperature zones, then the maximum setpoint
is the maximum of the 2 zones.

NOTICE
NOT configuring the system in the following way can cause damage to the heat
emitters. If there are 2 zones, it is important that in heating:
▪ the zone with the lowest water temperature is configured as the main zone, and
▪ the zone with the highest water temperature is configured as the additional zone.

NOTICE
If there are 2 zones and the emitter types are wrongly configured, water of high
temperature can be sent towards a low temperature emitter (underfloor heating). To
avoid this:
▪ Install an aquastat/thermostatic valve to avoid too high temperatures towards a
low temperature emitter.
▪ Make sure you set the emitter types for the main zone [2.7] and for the
additional zone [3.7] correctly in accordance with the connected emitter.

NOTICE
Average emitter temperature = Leaving water temperature – (Delta T)/2
This means that for a same leaving water temperature setpoint, the average emitter
temperature of radiators is lower than that of underfloor heating because of a bigger
delta T.
Example radiators: 40–8/2=36°C
Example underfloor heating: 40–5/2=37.5°C
To compensate, you can:
▪ Increase the weather-dependent curve desired temperatures [2.5].
▪ Enable leaving water temperature modulation and increase the maximum
modulation [2.C].

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 125
10 | Configuration
Setpoint range
To prevent a wrong (i.e. too hot or too cold) leaving water temperature for the
main leaving water temperature zone, limit its temperature range.

NOTICE
In case of a floor heating application it is important to limit the:
▪ maximum leaving water temperature at heating operation according to the
specifications of the floor heating installation.
▪ the minimum leaving water temperature at cooling operation to 18~20°C to
prevent condensation on the floor.

NOTICE
▪ When adjusting the leaving water temperature ranges, all desired leaving water
temperatures are also adjusted to guarantee they are between the limits.
▪ Always balance between the desired leaving water temperature with the desired
room temperature and/or the capacity (according to the design and selection of
the heat emitters). The desired leaving water temperature is the result of several
settings (preset values, shift values, weather-dependent curves, modulation). As a
result, too high or too low leaving water temperatures could occur which lead to
overtemperatures or capacity shortage. By limiting the leaving water
temperature range to adequate values (depending on the heat emitter), such
situations can be avoided.

Example: In heating mode, leaving water temperatures must be sufficiently higher

than the room temperatures. To avoid that the room cannot heat up as desired,
set the minimum leaving water temperature to 28°C.

# Code Description
Leaving water temperature range for the main leaving water temperature zone (=
the leaving water temperature zone with the lowest leaving water temperature in
heating operation and the highest leaving water temperature in cooling
operation)
[2.8.1] [9-01] Heating minimum:
▪ 15°C~37°C
[2.8.2] [9-00] Heating maximum:
▪ [2‑0C]=2 (emitter type main zone = radiator)
37°C~60°C
▪ Else: 37°C~55°C
[2.8.3] [9-03] Cooling minimum:
▪ 5°C~18°C
[2.8.4] [9-02] Cooling maximum:
▪ 18°C~22°C

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
126 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Control
Define how the operation of the unit is controlled.
Control In this control...
Leaving water Unit operation is decided based on the leaving water
temperature regardless the actual room temperature
and/or heating or cooling demand of the room.
External room Unit operation is decided by the external thermostat or
thermostat equivalent (e.g. heat pump convector).
Room thermostat Unit operation is decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface used as a room
thermostat.
# Code Description
[2.9] [C‑07] ▪ 0: Leaving water
▪ 1: External room thermostat
▪ 2: Room thermostat

Thermostat type
Only applicable in external room thermostat control.

NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room thermostat will control the
room frost protection. However, the room frost protection is only possible if [C.2]
Space heating/cooling=On.

# Code Description
[2.A] [C‑05] External room thermostat type for the main
zone:
▪ 1: 1 contact: The used external room
thermostat can only send a thermo ON/OFF
condition. There is no separation between
heating or cooling demand. The room
thermostat is connected to only 1 digital input
(X2M/35).
Select this value in case of a connection to the
heat pump convector (FWXV).
▪ 2: 2 contacts: The used external room
thermostat can send a separate heating/cooling
thermo ON/OFF condition. The room
thermostat is connected to 2 digital inputs
(X2M/35 and X2M/34).
Select this value in case of a connection to the
wired (EKRTWA) or wireless (EKRTR1) room
thermostat

Leaving water temperature: Delta T

In heating for the main zone, the target delta T (temperature difference) depends
on the selected emitter type for the main zone.
Delta T is the absolute value of the temperature difference between the leaving
water and entering water.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 127
10 | Configuration
The unit is designed to support underfloor loops operation. The recommended
leaving water temperature for underfloor loops is 35°C. In such case, the unit will
realize a temperature difference of 5°C, which means that the entering water
temperature is around 30°C.
Depending on the installed type of heat emitters (radiators, heat pump convector,
underfloor loops) or situation, you can change the difference between entering
and leaving water temperature.
Note: The pump will regulate its flow to keep the delta T. In some special cases,
the measured delta T can differ from the set value.

INFORMATION
When only the backup heater is active in heating, delta T will be controlled according
to the fixed capacity of the backup heater. It is possible that this delta T is different
from the selected target delta T.

INFORMATION
In heating, the target delta T will only be achieved after some operation time, when
the setpoint is being reached, because of the big difference between leaving water
temperature setpoint and inlet temperature at startup.

# Code Description
[2.B.1] [1‑0B] Delta T heating: A minimum temperature
difference is required for proper operation of
heat emitters in heating mode.
▪ If [2-0C]=2, this is fixed to 8°C
▪ Else: 3°C~10°C
[2.B.2] [1‑0D] Delta T cooling: A minimum temperature
difference is required for proper operation of
heat emitters in cooling mode.
▪ 3°C~10°C

Leaving water temperature: Modulation

Only applicable in case of room thermostat control.
When using the room thermostat functionality, the customer needs to set the
desired room temperature. The unit will supply hot water to the heat emitters and
the room will be heated.
Additionally, also the desired leaving water temperature must be configured: if
Modulation is enabled, the unit automatically calculates the desired leaving
water temperature. These calculations are based on:
▪ the preset temperatures, or
▪ the desired weather-dependent temperatures (if weather-dependent is enabled)
Moreover, with Modulation enabled, the desired leaving water temperature is
lowered or raised in function of the desired room temperature and the difference
between the actual and the desired room temperature. This results in:
▪ stable room temperatures, exactly matching the desired temperature (higher
comfort level)
▪ less on/off cycles (lower noise level, higher comfort and higher efficiency)
▪ water temperatures as low as possible to match the desired temperature (higher
efficiency)

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
128 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
If Modulation is disabled, set the desired leaving water temperature via [2] Main
zone.
# Code Description
[2.C.1] [8‑05] Modulation:
▪ 0 No (disabled)
▪ 1 Yes (enabled)
Note: The desired leaving water temperature
can only be read out on the user interface.
[2.C.2] [8‑06] Max modulation:
▪ 0°C~10°C
This is the temperature value by which the
desired leaving water temperature is increased or
decreased.

INFORMATION
When leaving water temperature modulation is enabled, the weather‑dependent
curve needs to be set to a higher position than [8-06] plus the minimum leaving
water temperature setpoint required to reach a stable condition on the comfort
setpoint for the room. To increase efficiency, modulation can lower the leaving water
setpoint. By setting the weather‑dependent curve to a higher position, it cannot drop
below the minimum setpoint. See the illustration below.

Tt

+[8-06]

−[8-06]

a
b

Ta

a Weather-dependent curve
b Minimum leaving water temperature setpoint required to reach a stable condition
on the comfort setpoint for the room.

Shut off valve

The following is only applicable in case of 2 leaving water temperature zones. In
case of 1 leaving water temperature zone, connect the shut-off valve to the
heating/cooling output.
The shut off valve for the main leaving water temperature zone can close under
these circumstances:

INFORMATION
During defrost operation, the shut-off valve is ALWAYS opened.

During thermo: If [F‑0B] is enabled, the shut off valve closes when there is no
heating demand from the main zone. Enable this setting to:
▪ avoid leaving water supply to the heat emitters in the main LWT zone (through
the mixing valve station) when there is request from the additional LWT zone.
▪ activate the ON/OFF pump of the mixing valve station ONLY when there is
demand.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 129
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[2.D.1] [F-0B] The shut off valve:
▪ 0 No: is NOT influenced by heating or cooling
demand.
▪ 1 Yes: closes when there is NO heating or
cooling demand.

INFORMATION
The setting [F‑0B] is only valid when there is a thermostat or external room
thermostat request setting (NOT in case of leaving water temperature setting).

10.5.4 Additional zone

Setpoint screen
Control the leaving water temperature for the additional zone via setpoint screen
[3] Additional zone.
See "10.3.5 Setpoint screen" [4107].
Schedule
Indicates if the desired leaving water temperature is according to a schedule.
See "10.5.3 Main zone" [4121].
# Code Description
[3.1] N/A Schedule:
▪ No
▪ Yes

Heating schedule
Define a heating temperature schedule for the additional zone via [3.2] Heating
schedule.
See "10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example" [4108].
Cooling schedule
Define a cooling temperature schedule for the additional zone via [3.3] Cooling
schedule.
See "10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example" [4108].
Setpoint mode
The setpoint mode of the additional zone can be independently set from the
setpoint mode of the main zone.
See "Setpoint mode" [4122].
# Code Description
[3.4] N/A Setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed
▪ WD heating, fixed cooling
▪ Weather dependent

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
130 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Heating WD curve
Set weather-dependent heating for the additional zone (if [3.4]=1 or 2):
# Code Description
[3.5] [0-00] Set weather-dependent heating:
Tt
[0-01]
[0-02] [0-01]

[0-03]
[0-00]

[0-03] [0-02] Ta

▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature

(additional zone)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
▪ [0-03]: Low outdoor ambient temperature. –
40°C~+5°C
▪ [0-02]: High outdoor ambient temperature.
10°C~25°C
▪ [0-01]: Desired leaving water temperature
when the outdoor temperature equals or drops
below the low ambient temperature.
[9‑05]°C~[9‑06]°C
Note: This value should be higher than [0‑00]
as for low outdoor temperatures warmer water
is required.
▪ [0-00]: Desired leaving water temperature
when the outdoor temperature equals or rises
above the high ambient temperature.
[9‑05]~min(45, [9‑06])°C
Note: This value should be lower than [0‑01] as
for high outdoor temperatures less warm water
is required.

Cooling WD curve
Set weather-dependent cooling for the additional zone (if [3.4]=2):

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 131
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[3.6] [0-04] Set weather-dependent cooling:
Tt
[0-05]
[0-06] [0-05]

[0-07]
[0-04]

[0-07] [0-06] Ta

▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature

(additional zone)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
▪ [0-07]: Low outdoor ambient temperature.
10°C~25°C
▪ [0-06]: High outdoor ambient temperature.
25°C~43°C
▪ [0-05]: Desired leaving water temperature
when the outdoor temperature equals or drops
below the low ambient temperature.
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C
Note: This value should be higher than [0‑04]
as for low outdoor temperatures less cold
water is required.
▪ [0-04]: Desired leaving water temperature
when the outdoor temperature equals or rises
above the high ambient temperature.
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C
Note: This value should be lower than [0‑05] as
for high outdoor temperatures colder water is
required.

Emitter type
For more information about Emitter type, see "10.5.3 Main zone" [4121].
# Code Description
[3.7] [2‑0D] Emitter type:
▪ 0: Underfloor heating
▪ 1: Fancoil unit
▪ 2: Radiator
The setting of the emitter type has an influence on the space heating setpoint
range and the target delta T in heating as follows:
Emitter type Space heating setpoint Target delta T in heating
Additional zone range [9‑05]~[9‑06] [1‑0C]
0: Underfloor Maximum 55°C Variable (see [3.B.1])
heating
1: Fancoil unit Maximum 55°C Variable (see [3.B.1])
2: Radiator Maximum 65°C Fixed 8°C

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
132 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Setpoint range
For more information about Setpoint range, see "10.5.3 Main zone" [4121].
# Code Description
Leaving water temperature range for the additional leaving water temperature
zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the highest leaving water
temperature in heating operation and the lowest leaving water temperature in
cooling operation)
[3.8.1] [9-05] Heating minimum: 15°C~37°C
[3.8.2] [9-06] Heating maximum
▪ [2‑0D]=2 (emitter type additional zone =
radiator)
37°C~60°C
▪ Else: 37°C~55°C
[3.8.3] [9-07] Cooling minimum
▪ 5°C~18°C
[3.8.4] [9-08] Cooling maximum
▪ 18°C~22°C

Control
The control type for the additional zone is read only. It is determined by the control
type of the main zone.
See "10.5.3 Main zone" [4121].
# Code Description
[3.9] N/A Control:
▪ Leaving water if the control type of the
main zone is Leaving water.
▪ External room thermostat if the control
type of the main zone is:
- External room thermostat,or
- Room thermostat.

Thermostat type
Only applicable in external room thermostat control.
Also see "10.5.3 Main zone" [4121].
# Code Description
[3.A] [C‑06] External room thermostat type for the additional
zone:
▪ 1: 1 contact. Connected to only 1 digital
input (X2M/35a)
▪ 2: 2 contacts. Connected to 2 digital inputs
(X2M/34a and X2M/35a)

Leaving water temperature: Delta T

For more information, see "10.5.3 Main zone" [4121].

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 133
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[3.B.1] [1-0C] Delta T heating: A minimum temperature
difference is required for the good operation of
heat emitters in heating mode.
▪ If [2-0D] = 2, this is fixed to 8°C
▪ Else: 3°C~10°C
[3.B.2] [1-0E] Delta T cooling: A minimum temperature
difference is required for the good operation of
heat emitters in cooling mode.
▪ 3°C~10°C

10.5.5 Space heating/cooling

About space operation modes
Your unit can be a heating or a heating/cooling model:
▪ If your unit is a heating model, it can heat up a space.
▪ If your unit is a heating/cooling model, it can both heat up and cool down a
space. You have to tell the system which operation mode to use.
To determine if a heating/cooling heat pump model is installed
1 Go to [4]: Space heating/cooling.
2 Check if [4.1] Operation mode is listed and editable. If so, a
heating/cooling heat pump model is installed.
To tell the system which space operation to use, you can:
You can… Location
Check which space operation mode is currently used. Home screen
Set the space operation mode permanently. Main menu
Restrict automatic changeover according to a monthly
schedule.

To check which space operation mode is currently used

The space operation mode is displayed on the home screen:
▪ When the unit is in heating mode, the icon is shown.
▪ When the unit is in cooling mode, the icon is shown.
The status indicator shows if the unit is currently in operation:
▪ When the unit is not in operation, the status indicator will show a blue pulsation
with an interval of approximately 5 seconds.
▪ While the unit is in operation, the status indicator will light up blue constantly.
To set the space operation mode
1 Go to [4.1]: Space heating/cooling > Operation mode

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
134 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
2 Select one of the following options:
▪ Heating: Only heating mode
▪ Cooling: Only cooling mode
▪ Automatic: The operation mode changes automatically
between heating and cooling based on the outdoor
temperature. Restricted per month according to the
Operation mode schedule [4.2].
When Automatic is selected, the unit switches its operation mode, based on the
Operation mode schedule [4.2]. In this schedule, the end user indicates which
operation is allowed for each month.
To restrict automatic changeover according to a schedule
Conditions: You set the space operation mode to Automatic.
1 Go to [4.2]: Space heating/cooling > Operation mode
schedule.
2 Select a month.
3 For each month, select an option:
▪ Reversible: Not restricted
▪ Heating only: Restricted
▪ Cooling only: Restricted
4 Confirm the changes.

Example: Changeover restrictions

When Restriction
During cold season. Heating only
Example: October, November, December, January,
February and March.
During warm season. Cooling only
Example: June, July and August.
In-between. Reversible
Example: April, May and September.
The unit determines its operation mode by the outdoor temperature if:
▪ Operation mode=Automatic, and
▪ Operation mode schedule=Reversible.
The unit determines its operation mode in such a way that it will always stay within
the following operation ranges:
▪ Space heating off temperature
▪ Space cooling off temperature
The outdoor temperature is time-averaged. If the outdoor temperature drops, the
operation mode will switch to heating and vice versa.
If the outdoor temperature is between the Space heating off temperature
and the Space cooling off temperature, the operation mode remains
unchanged.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 135
10 | Configuration
Operation range
Depending on the average outdoor temperature, the operation of the unit in space
heating or space cooling is prohibited.
# Code Description
[4.3.1] [4-02] Space heating off temperature: When
the averaged outdoor temperature rises above
this value, space heating is turned off.(a)
▪ 14°C~35°C
[4.3.2] [F-01] Space cooling off temperature: When
the averaged outdoor temperature drops below
this value, space cooling is turned off.(a)
▪ 10°C~35°C
(a)
This setting is also used in automatic heating/cooling changeover.

Exception: If the system is configured in room thermostat control with one leaving
water temperature zone and quick heat emitters, the operation mode will change
based on the measured indoor temperature. Besides the desired heating/cooling
room temperature, the installer sets a hysteresis value (e.g. when in heating, this
value is related to the desired cooling temperature) and an offset value (e.g. when
in heating, this value is related to the desired heating temperature).
Example: A unit is configured as following:
▪ Desired room temperature in heating mode: 22°C
▪ Desired room temperature in cooling mode: 24°C
▪ Hysteresis value: 1°C
▪ Offset: 4°C
Changeover from heating to cooling will occur when the room temperature rises
above the maximum of the desired cooling temperature added by the hysteresis
value (thus 24+1=25°C) and the desired heating temperature added by the offset
value (thus 22+4=26°C).
Oppositely, changeover from cooling to heating will occur when the room
temperature drops below the minimum of the desired heating temperature
subtracted by the hysteresis value (thus 22–1=21°C) and the desired cooling
temperature subtracted by the offset value (thus 24–4=20°C)
Guard timer to prevent too frequent changing from heating to cooling and vice
versa.
# Code Description
Changeover settings related to the indoor temperature.
Only applicable when Automatic is selected and the system is configured in
room thermostat control with 1 leaving water temperature zone and quick heat
emitters.
N/A [4-0B] Hysteresis: ensures that changeover is only done
when necessary.
The space operation only changes from heating
to cooling when the room temperature rises
above the desired cooling temperature added by
the hysteresis value.
▪ Range: 1°C~10°C

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
136 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Description
N/A [4-0D] Offset: ensures that the active desired room
temperature is always reached.
In heating mode, the space operation only
changes when the room temperature rises above
the desired heating temperature added by the
offset value.
▪ Range: 1°C~10°C

Number of zones
The system can supply leaving water to up to 2 water temperature zones. During
configuration, the number of water zones must be set.
# Code Description
[4.4] [7‑02] ▪ 0: Single zone
Only one leaving water temperature zone:

a Main LWT zone

[4.4] [7‑02] ▪ 1: Dual zone
Two leaving water temperature zones. The
main leaving water temperature zone consists
of the higher load heat emitters and a mixing
station to achieve the desired leaving water
temperature. In heating:

a Additional LWT zone: Highest temperature

b Main LWT zone: Lowest temperature
c Mixing station

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 137
10 | Configuration

NOTICE
NOT configuring the system in the following way can cause damage to the heat
emitters. If there are 2 zones, it is important that in heating:
▪ the zone with the lowest water temperature is configured as the main zone, and
▪ the zone with the highest water temperature is configured as the additional zone.

NOTICE
If there are 2 zones and the emitter types are wrongly configured, water of high
temperature can be sent towards a low temperature emitter (underfloor heating). To
avoid this:
▪ Install an aquastat/thermostatic valve to avoid too high temperatures towards a
low temperature emitter.
▪ Make sure you set the emitter types for the main zone [2.7] and for the
additional zone [3.7] correctly in accordance with the connected emitter.

Pump operation mode

When the space heating/cooling operation is OFF, the pump is always OFF. When
space heating/cooling operation is ON, you have the choice between these
operation modes:
# Code Description
[4.5] [F–0D] Pump operation mode:
▪ 0 Continuous: Continuous pump operation,
regardless of thermo ON or OFF condition.
Remark: Continuous pump operation requires
more energy than sample or request pump
operation.
a
b c

b c
d

a Space heating/cooling control

b Off
c On
d Pump operation

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
138 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[4.5] [F-0D] ▪ 1 Sample: The pump is ON when there is
heating or cooling demand as the leaving water
temperature has not yet reached the desired
temperature yet. When thermo OFF condition
occurs, the pump runs every 3 minutes to
check the water temperature and demand
heating or cooling if necessary. Remark:
Sample is ONLY available in leaving water
temperature control.
a
b c

d e
f

g
b
c

a Space heating/cooling control

b Off
c On
d LWT temperature
e Actual
f Desired
g Pump operation
[4.5] [F-0D] ▪ 2 Request: Pump operation based on request.
Example: Using a room thermostat and
thermostat creates thermo ON/OFF condition.
Remark: NOT available in leaving water
temperature control.
a
b c
d
c b

e
b c

a Space heating/cooling control

b Off
c On
d Heating demand (by external room thermostat
or room thermostat)
e Pump operation

Unit type
In this part of the menu it can be read out which type of unit is used:
# Code Description
[4.6] [E‑02] Unit type:
▪ 0 Reversible
▪ 1 Heating only

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 139
10 | Configuration
Pump limitation
Pump speed limitation [9‑0D] defines the maximum pump speed. In normal
conditions, the default setting should NOT be modified. The pump speed limitation
will be overruled when the flow rate is in the range of the minimum flow (error
7H).
In most cases, instead of using [9-0D], you can prevent flow noises by performing
hydraulic balancing.
# Code Description
[4.7] [9-0D] Pump limitation
Possible values: see below.
Possible values:
Value Description
0 No limitation
1~4 General limitation. There is limitation in all conditions. The
required delta T control and comfort are NOT guaranteed.
▪ 1: 90% pump speed
▪ 2: 80% pump speed
▪ 3: 70% pump speed
▪ 4: 60% pump speed
5~8 Limitation when no actuators. When there is no heating output,
the pump speed limitation is applicable. When there is heating
output, the pump speed is only determined by delta T in
relation to the required capacity. With this limitation range,
delta T is possible and the comfort is guaranteed.
During sampling operation the pump runs for a short time to
measure the water temperatures, which indicate if operation is
required or not.
▪ 5: 90% pump speed during sampling
▪ 6: 80% pump speed during sampling
▪ 7: 70% pump speed during sampling
▪ 8: 60% pump speed during sampling
The maximum values depend on the unit type:
[9-0D]=0 [9-0D]=1/5
a (kPa) a (kPa)

b (l/min) b (l/min)

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
140 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
[9-0D]=2/6 [9-0D]=3/7
a (kPa) a (kPa)

b (l/min) b (l/min)

[9-0D]=4/8
a (kPa)

b (l/min)

a External static pressure

b Water flow rate

Pump outside range

When the pump operation function is disabled the pump will stop if the outdoor
temperature is higher than the value set by the Space heating off
temperature [4‑02] or if the outdoor temperature drops below the value set by
the Space cooling off temperature [F‑01]. When the pump operation is
enabled, the pump operation is possible at all outdoor temperatures.
# Code Description
[4.9] [F-00] Pump operation:
▪ 0: Disabled if outdoor temperature is higher
than [4‑02] or lower than [F‑01] depending on
heating/cooling operation mode.
▪ 1: Possible at all outdoor temperatures.

Increase around 0°C

Use this setting to compensate for possible heat losses of the building due to the
evaporation of melted ice or snow. (e.g. in cold region countries).
In heating operation, the desired leaving water temperature is locally increased
around an outdoor temperature of 0°C.This compensation can be selected when
using an absolute or a weather dependent desired temperature (see illustration
below).
Tt Tt

L L

R R

0°C
TA 0°C
TA
a b

a Absolute desired LWT

b Weather dependent desired LWT

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 141
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[4.A] [D-03] Increase around 0°C:
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
▪ 2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
▪ 3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
▪ 4: increase 4°C, span 8°C

Overshoot
Restriction: This function is only applicable in heating mode.
This function defines how much the water temperature may rise above the desired
leaving water temperature before the compressor stops. The compressor will start
up again when the leaving water temperature drops below the desired leaving
water temperature.
# Code Description
[4.B] [9-04] Overshoot:
▪ 1°C~4°C

Antifrost
Room frost protection [1.4] prevents the room from getting too cold. For more
information about room frost protection, see "10.5.2 Room" [4118].

10.5.6 Tank
Comfort setpoint
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is Schedule only or
Schedule + reheat. When programming the schedule, you can make use of
the comfort setpoint as a preset value. When you later want to change the storage
setpoint, you only have to do it in one place.
The tank will heat up until the storage comfort temperature has been reached. It
is the higher desired temperature when a storage comfort action is scheduled.
Additionally, a storage stop can be programmed. This feature puts a stop to tank
heating even if the setpoint has NOT been reached. Only program a storage stop
when tank heating is absolutely undesirable.
# Code Description
[5.2] [6-0A] Comfort setpoint:
▪ 30°C~[6‑0E]°C

Eco setpoint
The storage economic temperature denotes the lower desired tank temperature.
It is the desired temperature when a storage economic action is scheduled
(preferably during day).
# Code Description
[5.3] [6-0B] Eco setpoint:
▪ 30°C~min(50,[6‑0E])°C

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
142 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Reheat setpoint
Desired reheat tank temperature, used:
▪ in Schedule + reheat mode, during reheat mode: the guaranteed minimum
tank temperature is set by the Reheat setpoint minus the reheat hysteresis.
If the tank temperature drops below this value, the tank is heated up.
▪ during storage comfort, to prioritize the domestic hot water preparation. When
the tank temperature rises above this value, domestic hot water preparation and
space heating/cooling are executed sequentially.
# Code Description
[5.4] [6-0C] Reheat setpoint:
▪ 30°C~min(50,[6‑0E])°C

Schedule
You can set the tank temperature schedule using the schedule screen. For more
information about this screen, see "10.3.7 Schedule screen: Example" [4108].
Heat up mode
The domestic hot water can be prepared in 3 different ways. They differ from each
other by the way the desired tank temperature is set and how the unit acts upon it.
# Code Description
[5.6] [6-0D] Heat up mode:
▪ 0: Reheat only: Only reheat operation is
allowed.
▪ 1: Schedule + reheat: The domestic hot
water tank is heated according to a schedule
and between the scheduled heat up cycles,
reheat operation is allowed.
▪ 2: Schedule only: The domestic hot water
tank can ONLY be heated according to a
schedule.
See the operation manual for more details.

INFORMATION
Risk of space heating capacity shortage for domestic hot water tank without internal
booster heater: In case of frequent domestic hot water operation, frequent and long
space heating/cooling interruption will happen when selecting the following:
Tank > Heat up mode > Reheat only.

10.5.7 User settings

Language
# Code Description
[7.1] N/A Language

Time/date
# Code Description
[7.2] N/A Set the local time and date

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 143
10 | Configuration

INFORMATION
By default, daylight savings time is enabled and clock format is set to 24 hours. If you
want to change these settings, you can do this in the menu structure (User
settings > Time/date) once the unit is initialised.

Holiday
About holiday mode
During your holiday, you can use the holiday mode to deviate from your normal
schedules without having to change them. While holiday mode is active, space
heating/cooling operation and domestic hot water operation will be turned off.
Room frost protection and anti-legionella operation will remain active.
Typical workflow
Using holiday mode typically consists of the following stages:
1 Setting the starting date and ending date of your holiday.
2 Activating the holiday mode.
To check if holiday mode is activated and/or running
If is displayed on the home screen, holiday mode is active.
To configure the holiday
1 Activate the holiday mode. —
▪ Go to [7.3.1]: User settings > Holiday > Activation.
7.3.1

Activation

From
Till

▪ Select On.
2 Set the first day of your holiday. —
▪ Go to [7.3.2]: From.
▪ Select a date.

▪ Confirm the changes.

3 Set the last day of your holiday. —
▪ Go to [7.3.3]: Till.
▪ Select a date.

▪ Confirm the changes.

Quiet
About quiet mode
You can use quiet mode to decrease the sound of the outdoor unit. However, this
also decreases the heating/cooling capacity of the system. There are multiple quiet
mode levels.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
144 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
You can:
▪ Completely deactivate quiet mode
▪ Manually activate a quiet mode level until the next scheduled action
▪ Use and program a quiet mode schedule

INFORMATION
If the outdoor temperature is below zero, we recommend to NOT use the most quiet
level.

To check if quiet mode is active

If is displayed on the home screen, quiet mode is active.
To use quiet mode
1 Go to [7.4.1]: User settings > Quiet > Activation.
2 Do one of the following: —

If you want to… Then…

Completely deactivate quiet Select Off.
mode
Manually activate a quiet Select the applicable quiet mode
mode level level. Example: Most quiet.
Use and program a quiet mode Select Automatic.
schedule
Go to [7.4.2] Schedule and
program the schedule. For more
information about scheduling, see
"10.3.7 Schedule screen:
Example" [4108].

Electricity prices and gas price

Only applicable in combination with the bivalent function. See also
"Bivalent" [4161].
# Code Description
[7.5.1] N/A Electricity price > High
[7.5.2] N/A Electricity price > Medium
[7.5.3] N/A Electricity price > Low
[7.6] N/A Gas price

INFORMATION
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON ([9.C.1] or [C-02]). These values
can only be set in menu structure [7.5.1], [7.5.2] and [7.5.3]. Do NOT use overview
settings.

To set the gas price

1 Go to [7.6]: User settings > Gas price.
2 Select the correct gas price.
3 Confirm the changes.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 145
10 | Configuration

INFORMATION
Price value ranging from 0.00~990 valuta/kWh (with 2 significant values).

To set the electricity price

1 Go to [7.5.1]/[7.5.2]/[7.5.3]: User settings > Electricity
price > High/Medium/Low.
2 Select the correct electricity price.
3 Confirm the changes.
4 Repeat this for all three electricity prices. —

INFORMATION
Price value ranging from 0.00~990 valuta/kWh (with 2 significant values).

INFORMATION
If no schedule is set, the Electricity price for High is taken into account.

To set the electricity price schedule timer

1 Go to [7.5.4]: User settings > Electricity price >
Schedule.
2 Program the selection using the scheduling screen. You can set —
the High, Medium and Low electricity prices according to your
electricity supplier.
3 Confirm the changes.

INFORMATION
The values correspond with the electricity price values for High, Medium and Low
previously set. If no schedule is set, the electricity price for High is taken into
account.

About energy prices in case of an incentive per kWh renewable energy

An incentive can be taken into account when setting the energy prices. Although
the running cost can increase, the total operation cost, taking into account the
reimbursement will be optimized.

NOTICE
Make sure to modify the setting of the energy prices at the end of the incentive
period.

To set the gas price in case of an incentive per kWh renewable energy
Calculate the value for the gas price with the following formula:
▪ Actual gas price+(Incentive/kWh×0.9)
For the procedure to set the gas price, see "To set the gas price" [4145].
To set the electricity price in case of an incentive per kWh renewable energy
Calculate the value for the electricity price with following formula:
▪ Actual electricity price+Incentive/kWh

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
146 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
For the procedure to set the electricity price, see "To set the electricity
price" [4146].
Example
This is an example and the prices and/or values used in this example are NOT
accurate.
Data Price/kWh
Gas price 4.08
Electricity price 12.49
Renewable heat incentive per kWh 5

Calculation of the gas price

Gas price=Actual gas price+(Incentive/kWh×0.9)
Gas price=4.08+(5×0.9)
Gas price=8.58
Calculation of the electricity price
Electricity price=Actual electricity price+Incentive/kWh
Electricity price=12.49+5
Electricity price=17.49
Price Value in breadcrumb
Gas: 4.08 /kWh [7.6]=8.6
Electricity: 12.49 /kWh [7.5.1]=17

10.5.8 Information
Dealer information
The installer can fill in his contact number here.
# Code Description
[8.3] N/A Number that users can call in case of problems.

Possible read-out information

In menu… You can read out…
[8.1] Energy data Produced energy, consumed electricity,
and consumed gas
[8.2] Malfunction history Malfunction history
[8.3] Dealer information Contact/helpdesk number
[8.4] Sensors Room, tank or domestic hot water,
outside, and leaving water temperature
(if applicable)
[8.5] Actuators Status/mode of each actuator
Example: Domestic hot water pump
ON/OFF
[8.6] Operation modes Current operation mode
Example: Defrost/oil return mode

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 147
10 | Configuration
In menu… You can read out…
[8.7] About Version information about the system
[8.8] Connection status Information about the connection
status of the unit, the room thermostat
and the LAN adapter.

10.5.9 Installer settings

Configuration wizard
After first power ON of the system, the user interface will guide you using the
configuration wizard. This way you can set the most important initial settings. This
way the unit will be able to run properly. Afterwards, more detailed settings can be
done via the menu structure if required.
To restart the configuration wizard, go to Installer settings >
Configuration wizard [9.1].

Domestic hot water

This part only applies to systems with an optional domestic hot water tank
installed.
Domestic hot water
The following setting determines if the system can prepare domestic hot water or
not, and which tank is used. Set this setting according to the actual installation.
# Code Description
(a)
[9.2.1] [E‑05] ▪ No DHW
[E‑06](a) No tank installed.
(a)
[E‑07] ▪ EKHWS/E
Tank with booster heater installed at the side of
the tank.
▪ EKHWP/HYC
Tank with optional booster heater installed at
the top of the tank.
(a)
Use the menu structure instead of the overview settings. Menu structure setting [9.2.1]
replaces the following 3 overview settings:
• [E-05]: Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
• [E-06]: Is a domestic hot water tank installed in the system?
• [E-07]: What kind of domestic hot water tank is installed?

In case of EKHWP, we recommend to use the following settings:

# Code Item EKHWP
[9.2.1] [E‑07] Tank type 5: EKHWP/HYC
N/A [4-05] Thermistor type 0: Automatic
[5.8] [6-0E] Maximum tank ≤70°C
temperature
In case of EKHWS*D* / EKHWSU*D*, we recommend to use the following settings:
# Code Item EKHWS*D* / EKHWSU*D*
150/180 200/250/300
[9.2.1] [E‑07] Tank type 0: EKHWS/E 5: EKHWP/HYC

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
148 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Item EKHWS*D* / EKHWSU*D*
150/180 200/250/300
N/A [4-05] Thermistor type 0: Automatic 1: Type 1
[5.8] [6-0E] Maximum tank ≤75°C
temperature
In case of a third-party tank, we recommend to use the following settings:
# Code Item Third-party tank
Coil≥1.05 m² Coil≥1.8 m²
[9.2.1] [E‑07] Tank type 0: EKHWS/E 5: EKHWP/HYC
N/A [4-05] Thermistor type 0: Automatic 1: Type 1
[5.8] [6-0E] Maximum tank ≤75°C
temperature

DHW pump
# Code Description
[9.2.2] [D‑02] DHW pump:
▪ 0: No DHW pump: NOT installed
▪ 1: Instant hot water: Installed for instant
hot water when water is tapped. The user sets
the operation timing of the domestic hot water
pump using the schedule. Control of this pump
is possible with the user interface.
▪ 2: Disinfection: Installed for disinfection. It
runs when the disinfection function of the
domestic hot water tank is running. No further
settings are needed.
See also illustrations below.

Domestic hot water pump installed for…

Instant hot water Disinfection
h h
c
c f
a i a i d f
b b
g e g

a Indoor unit
b Tank
c Domestic hot water pump
d Heater element
e Non‑return valve
f Shower
g Cold water
h Domestic hot water OUT
i Recirculation connection

DHW pump schedule

Program a schedule for the DHW pump (only for field supplied domestic hot
water pump for secondary return).
Program a domestic hot water pump schedule to determine when to turn on and
off the pump.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 149
10 | Configuration
When turned on, the pump runs and makes sure hot water is instantly available at
the tap. To save energy, only turn on the pump during periods of the day when
instant hot water is necessary.

Backup heater
Besides the type of backup heater, the voltage, configuration and capacity must be
set on the user interface.
The capacities for the different steps of the backup heater must be set for the
energy metering and/or power consumption feature to work properly. When
measuring the resistance value of each heater, you can set the exact heater
capacity and this will lead to more accurate energy data.
Backup heater type
The backup heater is adapted to be connected to most common European
electricity grids. The type of backup heater must be set on the user interface. For
units with a built-in backup heater, the type of heater can be viewed but not
changed.
# Code Description
[9.3.1] [E‑03] ▪ 3: 6V
▪ 4: 9W

Voltage
▪ For a 6V model, this can be set to:
- 230V, 1ph
- 230V, 3ph
▪ For a 9W model, this is fixed to 400V, 3ph.
# Code Description
[9.3.2] [5‑0D] ▪ 0: 230V, 1ph
▪ 1: 230V, 3ph
▪ 2: 400V, 3ph

Configuration
The backup heater can be configured in different ways. It can be chosen to have a
1-step only backup heater or a backup heater with 2 steps. If 2 steps, the capacity
of the second step depends on this setting. It can also be chosen to have a higher
capacity of the second step in emergency.
# Code Description
[9.3.3] [4‑0A] ▪ 1: Relay 1 / Relay 1+2
▪ 2: Relay 1 / Relay 2
▪ 3: Relay 1 / Relay 2 Emergency Relay 1+2

INFORMATION
Settings [9.3.3] and [9.3.5] are linked. Changing one setting influences the other. If
you change one, check if the other is still as expected.

INFORMATION
During normal operation, the capacity of the second step of the backup heater at
nominal voltage is equal to [6‑03]+[6‑04].

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
150 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration

INFORMATION
If [4‑0A]=3 and emergency mode is active, the power usage of the backup heater is
maximal and equal to 2×[6‑03]+[6‑04].

INFORMATION
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If the storage
temperature setpoint is higher than 50°C, Daikin recommends NOT to disable the
backup heater second step because it will have a big impact on the required time for
the unit to heat up the domestic hot water tank.

Capacity step 1
# Code Description
[9.3.4] [6‑03] ▪ The capacity of the first step of the backup
heater at nominal voltage.

Additional capacity step 2

# Code Description
[9.3.5] [6‑04] ▪ The capacity difference between the second
and first step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Nominal value depends on backup
heater configuration.

Operation
# Code Description
[9.3.8] [4‑00] Backup heater operation:
▪ 0: Restricted
▪ 1: Allowed
▪ 2: Only DHW: Backup heater operation is
enabled for domestic hot water and disabled
for space heating.

Booster heater
Capacity
The capacity of the booster heater must be set for the energy metering and/or
power consumption control feature to work properly. When measuring the
resistance value of the booster heater, you can set the exact heater capacity and
this will lead to more accurate energy data.
# Code Description
[9.4.1] [6‑02] Capacity [kW]. Only applies to domestic hot
water tank with an internal booster heater. The
capacity of the booster heater at nominal
voltage.
Range: 0~10 kW

BSH allowance schedule

Program when the booster heater can operate. You can set a schedule for the
booster heater here using the schedule screen. Two actions per day are allowed in
a week schedule. For more information, see "10.3.7 Schedule screen:
Example" [4108].
EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 151
10 | Configuration
Example: Only allow the booster heater to operate during the night.
BSH eco timer
# Code Description
[9.4.3] [8-03] Booster heater delay timer.
Start-up delay time for the booster heater when
domestic hot water mode is active.
▪ When domestic hot water mode is NOT active,
the delay time is 20 minutes.
▪ The delay time starts from booster heater ON
temperature.
▪ By adapting the booster heater delay time
versus the maximum running time, you can find
an optimal balance between the energy
efficiency and the heat up time.
▪ If the booster heater delay time is set too high,
it might take a long time before the domestic
hot water reaches its set temperature.
▪ The setting [8‑03] is only meaningful if setting
[4‑03]=1. Setting [4‑03]=0/2/3/4 limits the
booster heater automatically in relation to
heat pump operation time in domestic water
heating mode.
▪ Make sure that [8‑03] is always in relation with
the maximum running time [8‑01].
Range: 20~95 minutes

Operation
# Code Description
[9.4.4] [4-03] Defines the operation permission of the booster
heater depending on ambient, domestic hot
water temperature or operation mode of heat
pump. This setting is only applicable in reheat
mode for applications with separate domestic hot
water tank. When setting [4‑03]=1/2/3/4, the
booster heater operation can still be restricted by
the booster heater allowance schedule.
[9.4.4] [4-03] ▪ 0 Restricted: Booster heater operation is
NOT allowed except for "Disinfection function"
and "Powerful domestic water heating".
Only use this in case the heat pump capacity
can cover the heating requirements of the
house and domestic hot water during the
complete heating season.
The booster heater will not be allowed to
operate when Ta<[5‑03] and [5‑02]=1. The
domestic hot water temperature can be
maximum the heat pump OFF temperature.
[9.4.4] [4-03] ▪ 1 Allowed: Booster heater operation is
allowed when required.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
152 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[9.4.4] [4-03] ▪ 2 Overlap: The booster heater is allowed
outside the operation range of the heat pump
for domestic hot water operation.
Booster heater operation is only allowed if:
- Ambient temperature is out of the operating
range: Ta<[5‑03] or Ta>35°C
The booster heater is only allowed to operate
when Ta<[5‑03] if space heating priority is
enabled ([5‑02]=1).
- Domestic hot water temperature is 2°C lower
than the heat pump OFF temperature.
If bivalent operation is enabled ([C‑02]=1) and
permission signal for auxiliary boiler is ON, the
booster heater will be restricted even when
Ta<[5‑03].
9.4.4 [4-03] ▪ 3 Compressor off: The booster heater is
allowed when the heat pump is NOT active in
domestic hot water operation.
Same as setting 1, but simultaneous heat pump
domestic hot water operation and booster
heater operation is not allowed.
9.4.4 [4-03] ▪ 4 Legionella only: Booster heater
operation is NOT allowed except for
"Disinfection function".
Only use this in case the capacity of the
heat pump can cover the heating requirements
of the house and domestic hot water over the
complete heating season.
The booster heater will not be allowed to
operate when Ta<[5‑03] and [5‑02]=1. The
domestic hot water temperature can be
maximum the heat pump OFF temperature.

Emergency
Emergency
When the heat pump fails to operate, the backup heater and/or booster heater
can serve as an emergency heater and take over the heat load either automatically
or by manual interaction.
▪ When Emergency is set to Automatic and a heat pump failure occurs:
- the backup heater automatically takes over the heat load,
- the booster heater in the optional tank automatically takes over the domestic
hot water production.
▪ When Emergency is set to Manual and a heat pump failure occurs, the
domestic hot water operation and space heating stops.
To manually recover it via the user interface, go to the Malfunctioning main
menu screen and confirm whether the backup heater and/or booster heater can
take over the heat load or not.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 153
10 | Configuration
We recommend to set Emergency to Automatic if the house is unattended for
longer periods.
# Code Description
[9.5] N/A ▪ 0: Manual
▪ 1: Automatic

INFORMATION
The auto emergency setting can be set in the menu structure of the user interface
only.

INFORMATION
If a heat pump failure occurs and Emergency is set to Manual, the room frost
protection function, the underfloor heating screed dryout function, and the water
pipe antifreeze function will remain active even if the user does NOT confirm
emergency operation.

Glycol filled system

Glycol Filled system
This setting gives the installer the possibility to indicate whether the system is filled
with glycol or water. This is important in case glycol is used to protect the water
circuit against freezing. If NOT set correctly, the liquid in the piping can freeze.
# Code Description
N/A [E-0D] Glycol Filled system: Is the system filled
with glycol?
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes

Balancing
Priorities
For systems with a separate domestic hot water tank.
# Code Description
[9.6.1] [5-02] Space heating priority: Defines
whether domestic hot water is made by
booster heater only when outdoor
temperature is below space heating priority
temperature.
▪ 0: Off (default)
▪ 1: On
Please do NOT change the default value.
[5-01] Equilibrium temperature and [5-03]
Space heating priority temperature are related
to backup heater. So, you must set [5-03] equal
or a few degrees higher than [5-01].

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
154 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[9.6.2] [5-03] Priority temperature: Defines the
outdoor temperature which below the
domestic hot water will be heated by booster
heater only.
Please do NOT change the default value.
Range: –15°C~35°C
[9.6.3] [5-04] Offset BSH setpoint: Setpoint correction
for domestic hot water temperature: setpoint
correction for the desired domestic hot water
temperature, to be applied at low outdoor
temperature when space heating priority is
enabled. The corrected (higher) setpoint will
make sure that the total heat capacity of the
water in the tank remains approximately
unchanged, by compensating for the colder
bottom water layer of the tank (because the
heat exchanger coil is not operational) with a
warmer top layer.
Range: 0°C~20°C

Timers
For simultaneous space and domestic hot water operation request.
[8-02]: Anti-recycle timer

t
[8-01] [8-02]

1 Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not active)

2 Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
t Time
[8-04]: Additional timer at [4-02]/[F-01]
t t

[8-01]+ [8-01]+
[8-04] [8-04]

[8-02] [8-02]

[8-01] [8-01]

0 0
[5-03] [4-02] TA [F-01] 35°C TA

TA Ambient (outdoor) temperature

t Time
Anti-recycle timer
Maximum running time domestic hot water

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 155
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[9.6.4] [8-02] Anti-recycle timer: Minimum time
between two cycles for domestic hot water. The
actual anti-recycling time also depends on setting
[8-04].
Range: 0~10 hours
Remark: The minimum time is 0.5 hours even
when the selected value is 0.
[9.6.5] [8-00] Minimum running timer:
Do NOT change.
[9.6.6] [8-01] Maximum running timer for domestic hot
water operation. Domestic hot water heating
stops even when the target domestic hot water
temperature is NOT reached. The actual
maximum running time also depends on setting
[8-04].
▪ When Control=Room thermostat: This
preset value is only taken into account if there
is a request for space heating or cooling. If
there is NO request for space heating/cooling,
the tank is heated until the setpoint has been
reached.
▪ When Control≠Room thermostat: This
preset value is always taken into account.
Range: 5~95 minutes
Remark: It is NOT allowed to set [8‑01] to a value
below 10 minutes.
[9.6.7] [8-04] Additional timer: Additional running time
for the maximum running time depending on the
outdoor temperature [4-02] or [F-01].
Range: 0~95 minutes

Water pipe freeze prevention

Only relevant for installations with water piping outdoors. This function tries to
protect outdoor water piping from freezing.
# Code Description
[9.7] [4-04] Water pipe freeze prevention:
▪ 0: Continuous pump operation (read
only)

NOTICE
Water pipe freeze prevention. Even if you turn OFF space heating/cooling operation
([C.2]: Operation > Space heating/cooling), water pipe freeze prevention –if
enabled– will remain active.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
156 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Benefit kWh power supply

INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is connected to the same terminals
(X5M/9+10) as the safety thermostat. Thus, the system can have EITHER preferential
kWh rate power supply OR a safety thermostat.

# Code Description
[9.8.1] [D-01] Connection to a Benefit kWh power supply
or a Safety thermostat:
▪ 0 No: The outdoor unit is connected to a
normal power supply.
▪ 1 Open: The outdoor unit is connected to a
preferential kWh rate power supply. When the
preferential kWh rate signal is sent by the
electricity company, the contact will open and
the unit will go in forced off mode. When the
signal is released again, the voltage-free
contact will close and the unit will restart
operation. Therefore, always enable the auto
restart function.
▪ 2 Closed: The outdoor unit is connected to a
preferential kWh rate power supply. When the
preferential kWh rate signal is sent by the
electricity company, the contact will close and
the unit will go in forced off mode. When the
signal is released again, the voltage-free
contact will open and the unit will restart
operation. Therefore, always enable the auto
restart function.
▪ 3 Safety thermostat: A safety thermostat
is connected to the system (normal closed
contact)
[9.8.2] [D-00] Allow heater: Which heaters are allowed to
operate during preferential kWh rate power
supply?
▪ 0 No: None
▪ 1 Only BSH: Booster heater only
▪ 2 Only BUH: Backup heater only
▪ 3 All: All heaters
See table below.
Setting 2 is only meaningful if the preferential
kWh rate power supply is of type 1 or indoor unit
is connected to a normal kWh rate power supply
(via X2M/5‑6) and the backup heater is NOT
connected to the preferential kWh rate power
supply.
[9.8.3] [D-05] Allow pump:
▪ 0 No: Pump is forced off
▪ 1 Yes: No limitation

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 157
10 | Configuration
Allowed heaters during preferential kWh rate power supply
[D‑00] Booster heater Backup heater Compressor
0 Forced OFF Forced OFF Forced OFF
1 Permitted
2 Forced OFF Permitted
3 Permitted

Power consumption control

Power consumption control
See "6 Application guidelines" [4 30] for detailed information about this
functionality.
# Code Description
[9.9.1] [4-08] Power consumption control:
▪ 0 No: Disabled.
▪ 1 Continuous: Enabled: You can set one
power limitation value (in A or kW) to which
the system power consumption will be
limited for all the time.
▪ 2 Inputs: Enabled: You can set up to four
different power limitation values (in A or kW)
to which the system power consumption will
be limited when the corresponding digital
input asks.
[9.9.2] [4-09] Type:
▪ 0 Amp: The limitation values are set in A.
▪ 1 kW: The limitation values are set in kW.
Limit when [9.9.1]=Continuous and [9.9.2]=Amp:
# Code Description
[9.9.3] [5-05] Limit: Only applicable in case of full time
current limitation mode.
0 A~50 A
Limits when [9.9.1]=Inputs and [9.9.2]=Amp:
# Code Description
[9.9.4] [5-05] Limit 1: 0 A~50 A
[9.9.5] [5-06] Limit 2: 0 A~50 A
[9.9.6] [5-07] Limit 3: 0 A~50 A
[9.9.7] [5-08] Limit 4: 0 A~50 A
Limit when [9.9.1]=Continuous and [9.9.2]=kW:
# Code Description
[9.9.8] [5-09] Limit: Only applicable in case of full time
power limitation mode.
0 kW~20 kW

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
158 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
Limits when [9.9.1]=Inputs and [9.9.2]=kW:
# Code Description
[9.9.9] [5-09] Limit 1: 0 kW~20 kW
[9.9.A] [5-0A] Limit 2: 0 kW~20 kW
[9.9.B] [5-0B] Limit 3: 0 kW~20 kW
[9.9.C] [5-0C] Limit 4: 0 kW~20 kW

Priority heater
# Code Description
[9.9.D] [4-01] Power consumption control DISABLED
[4‑08]=0
▪ 0 None : Backup heater and booster heater
can operate simultaneously.
▪ 1 Booster heater: The booster heater is
prioritised.
▪ 2 Backup heater: The backup heater is
prioritised.
Power consumption control ENABLED
[4‑08]=1/2
▪ 0 None : Depending on the power limitation
level, the booster heater will be limited first,
before the backup heater is limited.
▪ 1 Booster heater: Depending on the
power limitation level, the backup heater will
be limited first, before the booster heater is
limited.
▪ 2 Backup heater: Depending on the power
limitation level, the booster heater will be
limited first, before the backup heater is
limited.
Note: In case power consumption control is DISABLED (for all models) the setting
[4‑01] defines whether backup heater and booster heater can operate
simultaneously, or if the booster heater/backup heater has priority over the
backup heater/booster heater.
In case power consumption control is ENABLED, the setting [4‑01] defines the
priority of the electrical heaters depending on applicable limitation.

Energy metering
Energy metering
If energy metering is performed by the use of external power meters, configure the
settings as described below. Select the pulse frequency output of each power
meter in accordance with the power meter specifications. It is possible to connect
up to 2 power meters with different pulse frequencies. If only 1 or no power meter
is used, select 'None' to indicate the corresponding pulse input is NOT used.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 159
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[9.A.1] [D‑08] Electricity meter 1:
▪ 0 None: NOT installed
▪ 1 1/10kWh: Installed
▪ 2 1/kWh: Installed
▪ 3 10/kWh: Installed
▪ 4 100/kWh: Installed
▪ 5 1000/kWh: Installed
[9.A.2] [D‑09] Electricity meter 2:
▪ 0 None: NOT installed
▪ 1 1/10kWh: Installed
▪ 2 1/kWh: Installed
▪ 3 10/kWh: Installed
▪ 4 100/kWh: Installed
▪ 5 1000/kWh: Installed

Sensors
External sensor
# Code Description
[9.B.1] [C–08] External sensor: When an optional external
ambient sensor is connected, the type of the
sensor must be set.
▪ 0 None : NOT installed. The thermistor in the
user interface and in the outdoor unit are used
for measurement.
▪ 1 Outdoor: Connected to PCB of the indoor
unit measuring the outdoor temperature.
Remark: For some functionality, the
temperature sensor in the outdoor unit is still
used.
▪ 2 Room: Connected to PCB of the indoor unit
measuring the indoor temperature. The
temperature sensor in the user interface is NOT
used anymore. Remark: This value has only
meaning in room thermostat control.

Ext. amb. sensor offset

ONLY applicable in case an external outdoor ambient sensor is connected and
configured.
You can calibrate the external outdoor ambient temperature sensor. It is possible
to give an offset to the thermistor value. This setting can be used to compensate
for situations where the external outdoor ambient sensor cannot be installed on
the ideal installation location.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
160 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[9.B.2] [2-0B] Ext. amb. sensor offset: Offset on the
ambient temperature measured on the external
outdoor temperature sensor.
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C

Averaging time
The average timer corrects the influence of ambient temperature variations. The
weather-dependent setpoint calculation is done on the average outdoor
temperature.
The outdoor temperature is averaged over the selected time period.
# Code Description
[9.B.3] [1-0A] Averaging time:
▪ 0: No averaging
▪ 1: 12 hours
▪ 2: 24 hours
▪ 3: 48 hours
▪ 4: 72 hours

Bivalent
Bivalent
Only applicable in case of auxiliary boiler.

NOTICE
Bivalent operation is only possible if:
▪ Space heating is turned ON, and
▪ DHW tank operation is turned OFF.

INFORMATION
Bivalent is only possible in case of 1 leaving water temperature zone with:
▪ room thermostat control, OR
▪ external room thermostat control.

About bivalent
The purpose of this function is to determine which heating source can/will provide
the space heating, either the heat pump system or the auxiliary boiler.
# Code Description
[9.C.1] [C-02] Bivalent: Indicates if the space heating is also
performed by means of another heat source than
the system.
▪ 0 No: Not installed
▪ 1 Yes: Installed. The auxiliary boiler (gas boiler,
oil burner) will operate when the outdoor
ambient temperature is low. During bivalent
operation, the heat pump is turned off. Set this
value in case an auxiliary boiler is used.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 161
10 | Configuration
▪ If Bivalent is enabled: When the outdoor temperature drops below the
bivalent ON temperature (fixed or variable based on energy prices), the space
heating by the heat pump stops automatically and the permission signal for the
auxiliary boiler is active.
▪ If Bivalent is disabled: Space heating is only done by the heat pump within the
operation range. The permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is always inactive.
The switch-over between the heat pump system and the auxiliary boiler is based
on the following settings:
▪ [C‑03] and [C‑04]
▪ Electricity and gas prices ([7.5.1], [7.5.2], [7.5.3], and [7.6])
[C‑03], [C‑04], and Tcalc
Based on the settings above, the heat pump system calculates a value Tcalc, which is
variable between [C‑03] and [C‑03]+[C‑04].
3°C
a

b
[C-03] Tcalc [C-03]+[C-04]
TA

TA Outdoor temperature
Tcalc Bivalent ON temperature (variable). Below this temperature, the auxiliary boiler will
always be ON. Tcalc can never go below [C‑03] or above [C‑03]+[C‑04].
3°C Fixed hysteresis to prevent too much switching between heat pump system and
auxiliary boiler
a Auxiliary boiler active
b Auxiliary boiler inactive
If the outdoor Then…
temperature… Space heating by the heat Bivalent signal for the
pump system… auxiliary boiler is…
Drops below Tcalc Stops Active
Rises above Tcalc+3°C Starts Inactive

INFORMATION
The permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is located on the EKRP1HBAA (digital I/O
PCB). When it is activated, the contact X1, X2 is closed and open when it is
deactivated. See illustration below for the schematic location of this contact.

X2M
X1 X2 X3 X4

OFF ON

SS1

X1M

YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

# Code Description
9.C.3 [C-03] Range: –25°C~25°C (step: 1°C)

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
162 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
# Code Description
9.C.4 [C-04] Range: 2°C~10°C (step: 1°C)
The higher the value of [C‑04], the higher the
accuracy of the switch-over between the heat
pump system and the auxiliary boiler.
To determine the value of [C‑03], proceed as follows:
1 Determine the COP (= coefficient of performance) using the formula:
Formula Example
(a)
COP = (Electricity price / gas price) × If:
boiler efficiency ▪ Electricity price: 20 c€/kWh
▪ Gas price: 6 c€/kWh
▪ Boiler efficiency: 0.9
Then: COP = (20/6)×0.9 = 3
(a)
Make sure to use the same units of measurement for the electricity price and gas price
(example: both c€/kWh).

2 Determine the value of [C‑03] using the graph. For an example, see the table
legend.
COP
6

0
-14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

2.5 (a) 10.5 (b)

a [C‑03]=2.5 in case of COP=3 and LWT=35°C

b [C‑03]=10.5 in case of COP=3 and LWT=55°C

NOTICE
Make sure to set the value of [5‑01] at least 1°C higher than the value of [C‑03].

Electricity and gas prices

INFORMATION
To set electricity and gas price values, do NOT use overview settings. Set them in the
menu structure instead ([7.5.1], [7.5.2], [7.5.3], and [7.6]). For more information on
how to set the energy prices, see the operation manual and the user reference
guide.

INFORMATION
Solar panels. If solar panels are used, set the electricity price value very low to
promote the use of the heat pump.

# Code Description
[7.5.1] N/A User settings > Electricity price >
High

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 163
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[7.5.2] N/A User settings > Electricity price >
Medium
[7.5.3] N/A User settings > Electricity price >
Low
[7.6] N/A User settings > Gas price

Boiler efficiency
Depending on the used boiler, this should be chosen as follows:
# Code Description
[9.C.2] [7‑05] ▪ 0: Very high
▪ 1: High
▪ 2: Medium
▪ 3: Low
▪ 4: Very low

Alarm output
Alarm output
# Code Description
[9.D] [C–09] Alarm output: Indicates the logic of alarm
output on digital I/O PCB during high level indoor
unit error malfunctioning. Low level errors
(caution/warning) will NOT be transmitted to
alarm output.
▪ 0 Abnormal: The alarm output will be
powered when an alarm occurs. By setting this
value, a distinction is made between the
detection of an alarm, and the detection of a
power failure.
▪ 1 Normal: The alarm output will NOT be
powered when an alarm occurs.
See also table below (Alarm output logic).

Alarm output logic

[C-09] Alarm No alarm No power supply
to unit
0 Closed output Open output Open output
1 Open output Closed output

Auto restart
Auto restart
When power returns after a power supply failure, the auto restart function
reapplies the user interface settings at the time of the power failure. Therefore, it
is recommended to always enable the function.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
164 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration
If the preferential kWh rate power supply is of the type that power supply is
interrupted, always enable the auto restart function. Continuous indoor unit
control can be guaranteed independent of the preferential kWh rate power supply
status, by connecting the indoor unit to a separate normal kWh rate power supply.
# Code Description
[9.E] [3-00] Auto restart:
▪ 0: Manual
▪ 1: Automatic

Power saving function

Power saving function
Defines whether the outdoor unit power supply can be interrupted (internally by
indoor unit control) during stand-still conditions (no space heating/cooling nor
domestic hot water demand). The final decision to allow power interruption of the
outdoor unit during standstill depends on the ambient temperature, compressor
conditions and minimum internal timers.
To enable the power saving function setting, [E‑08] needs to be enabled on the
user interface.
# Code Description
[9.F] [E‑08] Power saving function for outdoor unit:
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes

Disable protections

INFORMATION
Protective functions – "Installer-on-site mode". The software is equipped with
protective functions, such as room antifrost. The unit automatically runs these
functions when necessary.
During installation or service this behaviour is undesired. Therefore, the protective
functions can be disabled:
▪ At first power-on: The protective functions are disabled by default. After 12
hours they will be automatically enabled.
▪ Afterwards: An installer can manually disable the protective functions by setting
[9.G]: Disable protections=Yes. After his work is done, he can enable the
protective functions by setting [9.G]: Disable protections=No.

# Code Description
[9.G] N/A Disable protections:
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes

Forced defrost
Forced defrost
Manually start a defrost operation.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 165
10 | Configuration
# Code Description
[9.H] N/A Do you want to start a defrost operation?
▪ Back
▪ OK

NOTICE
Forced defrost start-up. You can only start forced defrost when the heating
operation has been running for a while.

Overview field settings

Almost all settings can be done using the menu structure. If for any reason it is
required to change a setting using the overview settings, then the overview
settings can be accessed in the field settings overview [9.I]. See "To modify an
overview setting" [4101].

10.5.10 Commissioning
About commissioning
See: "11 Commissioning" [4169]

10.5.11 User profile

[B] User profile: See "To change the user permission level" [4100].
B
Installer settings

Commissioning

User profile

Operation
Malfunctioning

10.5.12 Operation
To enable or disable functionalities
In the operation menu, you can separately enable or disable functionalities of the
unit.
# Code Description
[C.1] N/A Room:
▪ 0: Off
▪ 1: On
[C.2] N/A Space heating/cooling:
▪ 0: Off
▪ 1: On
[C.3] N/A Tank:
▪ 0: Off
▪ 1: On

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
166 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 10 | Configuration

10.6 Menu structure: Overview user settings

[1] Room
Schedule
Heating schedule
(*) Cooling schedule
Antifrost
[1.4] Antifrost
Setpoint range
Room sensor offset Activation
Room setpoint
[2] Main zone
[1.5] Setpoint range
Schedule
Heating schedule Heating minimum
(*) Cooling schedule Heating maximum
Setpoint mode (*) Cooling minimum
Heating WD curve (*) Cooling maximum
(*) Cooling WD curve

[3] Additional zone

Schedule
Heating schedule
[7.2] Time/date
(*) Cooling schedule
Setpoint mode Hours
Heating WD curve Minutes
(*) Cooling WD curve Year
Month
[4] Space heating/cooling Day
Operation mode Daylight savings time
(*) Operation mode schedule Format

[7.3] Holiday
[5] Tank
Activation
Powerful operation
From
Comfort setpoint
Till
Eco setpoint
Reheat setpoint [7.4] Quiet
Schedule
Activation
Schedule
[7] User settings
Language
[7.5] Electricity price
Time/date
Holiday High
Quiet Medium
Electricity price Low
Gas price Schedule

[8] Information
Energy data
[8.1] Energy data
Malfunction history
Dealer information Electricity input
Sensors Produced heat
Actuators
Operation modes
About
Connection status

[B]User profile

[C]Operation
Room
Space heating/cooling
Tank

Setpoint screen
(*) Only applicable for reversible models, or heating only models + conversion kit

INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings and unit type, settings will be visible/
invisible.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 167
10 | Configuration

10.7 Menu structure: Overview installer settings

[9] Installer settings [9.2] Domestic hot water
Configuration wizard Domestic hot water
Domestic hot water DHW pump
Backup heater DHW pump schedule
Solar
Booster heater
Emergency [9.3] Backup heater
Balancing
Backup heater type
Water pipe freeze prevention
Voltage
Benefit kWh power supply Configuration
Power consumption control Capacity step 1
Energy metering Additional capacity step 2
Sensors Equilibrium
Bivalent Equilibrium temperature
Alarm output Operation
Auto restart [9.4] Booster heater
Power saving function
Disable protections Capacity
BSH allowance schedule
Forced defrost
BSH eco timer
Overview field settings Operation

[9.6] Balancing
Space heating priority
Priority temperature
Offset BSH setpoint
Anti-recycle timer
Minimum running timer
Maximum running timer
Additional timer
[9.8] Benefit kWh power supply
Benefit kWh power supply
Allow heater
Allow pump

[9.9] Power consumption control

Power consumption control
Type
Limit
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Priority heater

[9.A] Energy metering

Electricity meter 1
Electricity meter 2

[9.B] Sensors
External sensor
Ext. amb. sensor offset
Averaging time

[9.C] Bivalent
Bivalent
Boiler efficiency
Temperature
Hysteresis

INFORMATION
Solar kit settings are shown but are NOT applicable for this unit. Settings shall NOT be
used or changed.

INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings and unit type, settings will be visible/
invisible.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
168 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 11 | Commissioning

11 Commissioning
NOTICE

Make sure both air purge valves (one on the magnetic filter and one on the backup
heater) are open.
All automatic air purge valves MUST remain open after commissioning.

INFORMATION
Protective functions – "Installer-on-site mode". The software is equipped with
protective functions, such as room antifrost. The unit automatically runs these
functions when necessary.
During installation or service this behaviour is undesired. Therefore, the protective
functions can be disabled:
▪ At first power-on: The protective functions are disabled by default. After 12
hours they will be automatically enabled.
▪ Afterwards: An installer can manually disable the protective functions by setting
[9.G]: Disable protections=Yes. After his work is done, he can enable the
protective functions by setting [9.G]: Disable protections=No.

11.1 Overview: Commissioning

This chapter describes what you have to do and know to commission the system
after it is installed and configured.
Typical workflow
Commissioning typically consists of the following stages:
1 Checking the "Checklist before commissioning".
2 Performing an air purge.
3 Performing a test run for the system.
4 If necessary, performing a test run for one or more actuators.
5 If necessary, performing an underfloor heating screed dryout.

11.2 Precautions when commissioning

INFORMATION
During the first running period of the unit, the required power may be higher than
stated on the nameplate of the unit. This phenomenon is caused by the compressor,
that needs a continuous run time of 50 hours before reaching smooth operation and
stable power consumption.

NOTICE
ALWAYS operate the unit with thermistors and/or pressure sensors/switches. If NOT,
burning of the compressor might be the result.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 169
11 | Commissioning

NOTICE
ALWAYS complete the refrigerant piping of the unit before operating. If NOT, the
compressor will break.

11.3 Checklist before commissioning

After the installation of the unit, first check the items listed below. Once all checks
are fulfilled, the unit MUST be closed. Power-up the unit after it is closed.
You read the complete installation instructions, as described in the installer reference
guide.
The indoor unit is properly mounted.

The outdoor unit is properly mounted.

The following field wiring has been carried out according to this document and the
applicable legislation:
▪ Between the local supply panel and the outdoor unit
▪ Between indoor unit and outdoor unit
▪ Between the local supply panel and the indoor unit
▪ Between the indoor unit and the valves (if applicable)
▪ Between the indoor unit and the room thermostat (if applicable)
▪ Between the indoor unit and the domestic hot water tank (if applicable)
The system is properly earthed and the earth terminals are tightened.

The fuses or locally installed protection devices are installed according to this document,
and have NOT been bypassed.
The power supply voltage matches the voltage on the identification label of the unit.

There are NO loose connections or damaged electrical components in the switch box.

There are NO damaged components or squeezed pipes on the inside of the indoor and
outdoor units.
Backup heater circuit breaker F1B (field supply) is turned ON.

Only for tanks with built-in booster heater:

Booster heater circuit breaker F2B (field supply) is turned ON.
The correct pipe size is installed and the pipes are properly insulated.

There is NO water leak inside the indoor unit.

The shut-off valves are properly installed and fully open.

The automatic air purge valves are open.

The pressure relief valve purges water when opened. Clean water MUST come out.

The minimum water volume is guaranteed in all conditions. See "To check the water
volume and flow rate" in "8.1 Preparing water piping" 4
[ 70].
(if applicable) The domestic hot water tank is filled completely.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
170 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 11 | Commissioning

11.4 Checklist during commissioning

The minimum flow rate during backup heater/defrost operation is guaranteed in all
conditions. See "To check the water volume and flow rate" in "8.1 Preparing water
piping" 4
[ 70].
To perform an air purge.

To perform a test run.

To perform an actuator test run.

Underfloor screed dryout function

The underfloor screed dryout function is started (if necessary).

11.4.1 To check the minimum flow rate

1 Check the hydraulic configuration to find out which space —

heating loops can be closed by mechanical, electronic, or other
valves.
2 Close all space heating loops that can be closed. —
3 Start the pump test run (see "11.4.4 To perform an actuator —
test run" [4173]).
4 Read out the flow rate(a) and modify the bypass valve setting to —
reach the minimum required flow rate + 2 l/min.
(a)
During pump test run, the unit can operate below the minimum required flow rate.

Minimum required flow rate

20 l/min

11.4.2 Air purge function

Purpose
When commissioning and installing the unit, it is very important to remove all air in
the water circuit. When the air purge function is running, the pump operates
without actual operation of the unit and the removal of air in the water circuit will
start.

NOTICE
Before starting the air purge, open the safety valve and check if the circuit is
sufficiently filled with water. Only if water escapes the valve after opening it, you can
start the air purge procedure.

Manual or automatic
There are 2 modes for purging air:
▪ Manual: You can set the pump speed to low or high. You can set the circuit (the
position of the 3-way valve) to Space or Tank. Air purge must be performed for
both space heating and tank (domestic hot water) circuits.
▪ Automatic: The unit automatically changes the pump speed and switches the
position of the 3-way valve between the space heating and the domestic hot
water circuit.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 171
11 | Commissioning
Typical workflow
Purging the air from the system should consist of:
1 Performing a manual air purge
2 Performing an automatic air purge

INFORMATION
Start by performing a manual air purge. When almost all the air is removed, perform
an automatic air purge. If necessary, repeat performing the automatic air purge until
you are sure that all air is removed from the system. During air purge function, pump
speed limitation [9‑0D] is NOT applicable.

The air purge function automatically stops after 30 minutes.

INFORMATION
For best results, air purge each loop separately.

To perform a manual air purge

Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to [C]: Operation and turn off
Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To change —
the user permission level" [4100].
2 Go to [A.3]: Commissioning > Air purge.
3 In the menu, set Type = Manual.
4 Select Start air purge.
5 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The air purge starts. It stops automatically when ready.
6 During manual operation:
▪ You can change the pump speed.
▪ You must change the circuit.
To change these settings during the air purge, open the menu
and go to [A.3.1.5]: Settings.
▪ Scroll to Circuit and set it to Space/Tank.

▪ Scroll to Pump speed and set it to Low/High.

7 To stop the air purge manually: —

1 Open the menu and go to Stop air purge.
2 Select OK to confirm.

To perform an automatic air purge

Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to [C]: Operation and turn off
Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To change —
the user permission level" [4100].
2 Go to [A.3]: Commissioning > Air purge.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
172 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 11 | Commissioning
3 In the menu, set Type = Automatic.
4 Select Start air purge.
5 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The air purge starts. It stops automatically when done.
6 To stop the air purge manually: —
1 In the menu, go to Stop air purge.
2 Select OK to confirm.

11.4.3 To perform an operation test run

Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to [C]: Operation and turn off
Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To change —
the user permission level" [4100].
2 Go to [A.1]: Commissioning > Operation test run.
3 Select a test from the list. Example: Heating.
4 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The test run starts. It stops automatically when ready
(±30 min).
To stop the test run manually: —
1 In the menu, go to Stop test run.
2 Select OK to confirm.

INFORMATION
If the outdoor temperature is outside the range of operation, the unit may NOT
operate or may NOT deliver the required capacity.

To monitor leaving water and tank temperatures

During test run, the correct operation of the unit can be checked by monitoring its
leaving water temperature (heating/cooling mode) and tank temperature
(domestic hot water mode).
To monitor the temperatures:
1 In the menu, go to Sensors.
2 Select the temperature information.

11.4.4 To perform an actuator test run

Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to [C]: Operation and turn off
Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank operation.
Purpose
Perform an actuator test run to confirm the operation of the different actuators.
For example, when you select Pump, a test run of the pump will start.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To change the —
user permission level" [4100].

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 173
11 | Commissioning
2 Go to [A.2]: Commissioning > Actuator test run.
3 Select a test from the list. Example: Pump.
4 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The actuator test run starts. It stops automatically when
ready (±30 min).
To stop the test run manually: —
1 In the menu, go to Stop test run.
2 Select OK to confirm.

11.4.5 Possible actuator test runs

▪ Booster heater test
▪ Backup heater 1 test
▪ Backup heater 2 test
▪ Pump test

INFORMATION
Make sure that all air is purged before executing the test run. Also avoid disturbances
in the water circuit during the test run.

▪ Shut off valve test

▪ Diverter valve test (3-way valve for switching between space heating and
tank heating)
▪ Bivalent signal test
▪ Alarm output test
▪ C/H signal test
▪ DHW pump test

11.4.6 Underfloor heating screed dryout

The underfloor heating (UFH) screed dryout function is used for drying out the
screed of an underfloor heating system during the construction of the building.
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to [C]: Operation and turn off
Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank operation.
The UFH screed dryout function can be executed without finishing the outdoor
installation. In this case, the backup heater will perform the screed dryout and
supply the leaving water without heat pump operation.
If the outdoor unit is not yet installed, connect the main power supply cable to the
indoor unit via X2M/30 and X2M/31. See "9.3.1 To connect the main power
supply" [489].

INFORMATION
▪ If Emergency is set to Manual ([9.5]=0), and the unit is triggered to start
emergency operation, the user interface will ask confirmation before starting.
The underfloor heating screed dryout function is active even if the user does NOT
confirm emergency operation.
▪ During underfloor heating screed dryout, pump speed limitation [9‑0D] is NOT
applicable.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
174 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 11 | Commissioning

NOTICE
The installer is responsible for:
▪ contacting the screed manufacturer for the maximum allowed water
temperature, to avoid cracking the screed,
▪ programming the underfloor heating screed dryout schedule according to the
initial heating instructions of the screed manufacturer,
▪ checking the proper functioning of the setup on a regular basis,
▪ performing the correct program complying with the type of the used screed.

NOTICE
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout, room frost protection needs to be
disabled ([2‑06]=0). By default, it is enabled ([2‑06]=1). However, due to the
"installer-on-site" mode (see "Commissioning"), room frost protection will be
automatically disabled for 12 hours after the first power-on.
If the screed dryout still needs to be performed after the first 12 hours of power-on,
manually disable room frost protection by setting [2‑06] to "0", and KEEP it disabled
until the screed dryout has finished. Ignoring this notice will result in cracking of the
screed.

NOTICE
For the underfloor heating screed dryout to be able to start, make sure the following
settings are met:
▪ [4‑00]=1
▪ [C‑02]=0
▪ [D‑01]=0
▪ [4‑08]=0
▪ [4‑01]≠1

The installer can program up to 20 steps. For each step he needs to enter:
1 the duration in hours, up to 72 hours,
2 the desired leaving water temperature, up to 55°C.
Example:
T
24h (1) 36h (2)

35°C (2)

25°C (1)
A1

T Desired leaving water temperature (15~55°C)

t Duration (1~72 h)
(1) Action step 1
(2) Action step 2

To program an underfloor heating screed dryout schedule

1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To change —
the user permission level" [4100].
2 Go to [A.4.2]: Commissioning > UFH screed dryout >
Program.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 175
11 | Commissioning
3 Program the schedule: —
To add a new step, select an empty line and change its value.
To delete a step and all steps below it, decrease the duration to
"–".
▪ Scroll through the schedule.
▪ Adjust the duration (between 1 and 72 hours) and
temperatures (between 15°C and 55°C).
4 Press the left dial to save the schedule.

To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout

Conditions: An underfloor heating screed dryout schedule has been programmed.
See "To program an underfloor heating screed dryout schedule" [4175].
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to [C]: Operation and turn off
Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To change —
the user permission level" [4100].
2 Go to [A.4]: Commissioning > UFH screed dryout.
3 Select Start UFH screed dryout.

4 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout starts. It stops
automatically when done.
5 To stop the underfloor heating screed dryout manually: —
1 Open the menu and go to Stop UFH screed dryout.
2 Select OK to confirm.

To read out the status of an underfloor heating screed dryout

Conditions: You are performing an underfloor heating screed dryout.
1 Press the back button.
Result: A graph is displayed, highlighting the current step of the
screed dryout schedule, the total remaining time, and the
current desired leaving water temperature.
2 Press the left dial to open the menu structure and to:
1 View the status of sensors and actuators. —
2 Adjust the current program —

To stop an underfloor heating (UFH) screed dryout

U3-error
When the program is stopped by an error, an operation switch off, or a power
failure, the U3 error will be displayed on the user interface. To resolve the error
codes, see "14.4 Solving problems based on error codes" [4191].
Stop UFH screed dryout
To manually stop underfloor heating screed dryout:

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
176 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 11 | Commissioning
1 Go to [A.4.3]: Commissioning > UFH screed dryout —
2 Select Stop UFH screed dryout.
3 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout is stopped.

Read out UFH screed dryout status

When the program is stopped due to an error, an operation switch-off, or a power
failure, you can read out the underfloor heating screed dryout status:
1 Go to [A.4.3]: Commissioning > UFH screed dryout >
Status
2 You can read out the value here: Stopped at + the step —
where the underfloor screed dryout was stopped.
3 Modify and restart the execution of the program(a). —
(a)
If the UFH screed dryout program was stopped due to a power failure and the power
resumes, the program will automatically restart the last implemented step.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 177
12 | Hand-over to the user

12 Hand-over to the user

Once the test run is finished and the unit operates properly, please make sure the
following is clear for the user:
▪ Fill in the installer setting table (in the operation manual) with the actual settings.
▪ Make sure that the user has the printed documentation and ask him/her to keep
it for future reference. Inform the user that he can find the complete
documentation at the URL mentioned earlier in this manual.
▪ Explain the user how to properly operate the system and what to do in case of
problems.
▪ Show the user what to do for the maintenance of the unit.
▪ Explain the user about energy saving tips as described in the operation manual.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
178 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 13 | Maintenance and service

13 Maintenance and service

NOTICE
Maintenance MUST be done by an authorised installer or service agent.
We recommend performing maintenance at least once a year. However, applicable
legislation might require shorter maintenance intervals.

NOTICE
Applicable legislation on fluorinated greenhouse gases requires that the refrigerant
charge of the unit is indicated both in weight and CO2 equivalent.
Formula to calculate the quantity in CO2 equivalent tonnes: GWP value of the
refrigerant × total refrigerant charge [in kg] / 1000

13.1 Overview: Maintenance and service

This chapter contains information about:
▪ The yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit
▪ The yearly maintenance of the indoor unit

13.2 Maintenance safety precautions

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

DANGER: RISK OF BURNING/SCALDING

NOTICE: Risk of electrostatic discharge

Before performing any maintenance or service work, touch a metal part of the unit in
order to eliminate static electricity and to protect the PCB.

13.3 Checklist for yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit

Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Heat exchanger
The heat exchanger of the outdoor unit can get blocked up due to dust, dirt,
leaves, etc. It is recommended to clean the heat exchanger yearly. A blocked
heat exchanger can lead to too low pressure or too high pressure leading to
worse performance.

13.4 Checklist for yearly maintenance of the indoor unit

Check the following at least once a year:

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 179
13 | Maintenance and service
▪ Water pressure
▪ Magnetic filter/dirt separator
▪ Water pressure relief valve
▪ Pressure relief valve of the domestic hot water tank
▪ Switch box
Water pressure
Keep water pressure above 1 bar. If it is lower, add water.
Magnetic filter/dirt separator

a
b
c

a Screw connection
b Magnetic sleeve
c Drain valve
d Drain cap
The yearly maintenance of the magnetic filter/dirt separator consists of:
▪ Checking if both parts of the magnetic filter/dirt separator are still screwed
tight (a).
▪ Emptying the dirt separator as follows:
1 Take off the magnetic sleeve (b).
2 Unscrew the drain cap (d).
3 Connect a drain hose to the bottom of the water filter so that the water and
dirt can be collected in a suitable container (bottle, sink...).
4 Open the drain valve for a couple of seconds (c).
Result: Water and dirt will come out.
5 Close the drain valve.
6 Screw the drain cap back on.
7 Reattach the magnetic sleeve.
8 Check the pressure of the water circuit. If required, add water.

NOTICE
▪ When checking the magnetic filter/dirt separator for tightness, hold it firmly, so
as NOT to apply stress to the water piping.
▪ Do NOT isolate the magnetic filter/dirt separator by closing the shut‑off valves. To
properly empty the dirt separator, sufficient pressure is required.
▪ To prevent dirt from remaining in the dirt separator, ALWAYS take off the
magnetic sleeve.
▪ ALWAYS first unscrew the drain cap, and connect a drain hose to the bottom of
the water filter, then open the drain valve.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
180 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 13 | Maintenance and service

INFORMATION
For yearly maintenance, you do not have to remove the water filter from the unit to
clean it. But in case of trouble with the water filter, you might have to remove it so
that you can thoroughly clean it. Then you need to do as follows:
▪ "13.5.1 To remove the water filter" 4 [ 182]
▪ "13.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble" 4
[ 182]
▪ "13.5.3 To install the water filter" 4
[ 184]

Water pressure relief valve

Open the valve and check if it operates correctly. The water may be very hot!
Checkpoints are:
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no blockage of the
valve or in between piping is suspected.
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
- open the valve until the discharged water does NOT contain dirt anymore
- flush the system
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
Pressure relief valve of the domestic hot water tank (field supply)
Open the valve.

CAUTION
Water coming out of the valve may be very hot.

▪ Check if nothing blocks the water in the valve or in between piping. The water
flow coming from the relief valve must be high enough.
▪ Check if the water coming out of the relief valve is clean. If it contains debris or
dirt:
- Open the valve until the discharged water does not contain debris or dirt
anymore.
- Flush and clean the complete tank, including the piping between the relief
valve and cold water inlet.
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank heat up cycle.

INFORMATION
It is recommended to perform this maintenance more than once a year.

Switch box
▪ Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the switch box and look for obvious
defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
▪ Using an ohmmeter, check if contactors K1M, K2M, K3M and K5M (depending on
your installation) operate correctly. All contacts of these contactors must be in
open position when the power is turned OFF.

WARNING
If the internal wiring is damaged, it has to be replaced by the manufacturer, its
service agent or similarly qualified persons.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 181
13 | Maintenance and service

13.5 About cleaning the water filter in case of trouble

INFORMATION
For yearly maintenance, you do not have to remove the water filter from the unit to
clean it. But in case of trouble with the water filter, you might have to remove it so
that you can thoroughly clean it. Then you need to do as follows:
▪ "13.5.1 To remove the water filter" 4 [ 182]
▪ "13.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble" 4
[ 182]
▪ "13.5.3 To install the water filter" 4
[ 184]

13.5.1 To remove the water filter

Prerequisite: Stop the unit operation via the user interface.
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the respective circuit breaker.
1 The water filter is located behind the switch box. To get access to it, see:
"7.2.5 To open the indoor unit" [463]
2 Close the stop valves of the water circuit.
3 Close the valve (if equipped) of the water circuit towards the expansion vessel.
4 Remove the cap on the bottom of the magnetic filter/dirt separator.
5 Connect a drain hose to the bottom of the water filter.
6 Open the valve on the bottom of the water filter to drain water from the
water circuit. Collect the drained water in a bottle, sink,… using the installed
drain hose.
7 Remove the 2 clips that fix the water filter.

a
a
b

a Clip
b Magnetic filter/dirt separator
8 Remove the water filter.
9 Remove the drain hose from the water filter.

NOTICE
Although the water circuit is drained, some water may be spilled when removing the
magnetic filter/dirt separator from the filter housing. ALWAYS clean up spilled water.

13.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble

1 Remove the water filter from the unit. See "13.5.1 To remove the water
filter" [4182].

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
182 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 13 | Maintenance and service

NOTICE
To protect the piping connected to the magnetic filter/dirt separator from damage it
is recommended to perform this procedure with the magnetic filter/dirt separator
removed from the unit.

2 Unscrew the bottom of the water filter housing. Use an appropriate tool if
needed.

NOTICE
Opening the magnetic filter/dirt separator is ONLY required in case of severe issues.
Preferably this action is never to be done during the complete lifetime of the
magnetic filter/dirt separator.

a Bottom part to be unscrewed

b Water filter housing
3 Remove the strainer and the rolled‑up filter from the water filter housing and
clean with water.
4 Install the cleaned rolled‑up filter and strainer in the water filter housing.

INFORMATION
Correctly install the strainer in the magnetic filter/dirt separator housing using the
protrusions.

c a

a Rolled‑up filter
b Strainer
c Protrusion
5 Install and properly tighten the bottom of the water filter housing.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 183
13 | Maintenance and service
13.5.3 To install the water filter

NOTICE
Check the condition of the O-rings and replace if needed. Apply water to the O-rings
before installation.

1 Install the water filter in the correct location.

c

a
a
b

a Clip
b Magnetic filter/dirt separator
c Air purge valve
2 Install the 2 clips to fix the water filter to the water circuit pipes.
3 Make sure that the air purge valve of the water filter is in the open position.
4 Open the valve (if equipped) of the water circuit towards the expansion vessel.

CAUTION
Make sure to open the valve (if equipped) towards the expansion vessel, otherwise
the overpressure will be generated.

5 Open the stop valves and add water to the water circuit if needed.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
184 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 14 | Troubleshooting

14 Troubleshooting
Contact
For the symptoms listed below, you can try to solve the problem yourself. For any
other problem, contact your installer. You can find the contact/helpdesk number
via the user interface.

14.1 Overview: Troubleshooting

This chapter describes what you have to do in case of problems.
It contains information about:
▪ Solving problems based on symptoms
▪ Solving problems based on error codes
Before troubleshooting
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for obvious defects such
as loose connections or defective wiring.

14.2 Precautions when troubleshooting

WARNING
▪ When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of the unit, ALWAYS make
sure that the unit is disconnected from the mains. Turn off the respective circuit
breaker.
▪ When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and find out why the safety
device was activated before resetting it. NEVER shunt safety devices or change
their values to a value other than the factory default setting. If you are unable to
find the cause of the problem, call your dealer.

DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION

WARNING
Prevent hazards due to inadvertent resetting of the thermal cut-out: power to this
appliance MUST NOT be supplied through an external switching device, such as a
timer, or connected to a circuit that is regularly turned ON and OFF by the utility.

DANGER: RISK OF BURNING/SCALDING

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 185
14 | Troubleshooting

14.3 Solving problems based on symptoms

14.3.1 Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or cooling as expected

Possible causes Corrective action
The temperature setting is NOT correct Check the temperature setting on the
remote controller. Refer to the
operation manual.
The water flow is too low Check and make sure that:
▪ All shut-off valves of the water circuit
are completely open.
▪ The water filter is clean. Clean if
necessary.
▪ There is no air in the system. Purge air
if necessary. You can purge air
manually (see "To perform a manual
air purge" [4 172]) or use the
automatic air purge function (see "To
perform an automatic air
purge" [4172]).
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT broken.
▪ The valve (if equipped) of the water
circuit towards the expansion vessel is
open.
▪ The resistance in the water circuit is
NOT too high for the pump (see the
ESP curve in the "Technical data"
chapter).
If the problem persists after you have
conducted all of the above checks,
contact your dealer. In some cases, it is
normal that the unit decides to use a
low water flow.
The water volume in the installation is Make sure that the water volume in the
too low installation is above the minimum
required value (see "8.1.3 To check the
water volume and flow rate" [473]).

14.3.2 Symptom: Hot water does NOT reach the desired temperature
Possible causes Corrective action
One of the tank temperature sensors is See the service manual of the unit for
broken. the corresponding corrective action.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
186 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 14 | Troubleshooting
14.3.3 Symptom: The compressor does NOT start (space heating or domestic water heating)
Possible causes Corrective action
The compressor cannot start if the If the backup heater doesn't start
water temperature is too low. The unit either, check and make sure that:
will use the backup heater to reach the ▪ The power supply to the backup
minimum water temperature (15°C), heater is correctly wired.
after which the compressor can start.
▪ The backup heater thermal protector
is NOT activated.
▪ The backup heater contactors are
NOT broken.
If the problem persists, contact your
dealer.
The preferential kWh rate power supply This should match with the connections
settings and electrical connections do as explained in:
NOT match ▪ "9.3.1 To connect the main power
supply" [489]
▪ "9.1.4 About preferential kWh rate
power supply" [486]
▪ "9.1.5 Overview of electrical
connections except external
actuators" [487]
The preferential kWh rate signal was In the user interface of the unit, go to
sent by the electricity company [8.5.B] Information > Actuators >
Forced off contact.
If Forced off contact is On, the
unit is operating under the preferential
kWh rate. Wait for the power to return
(maximum 2 hours).

14.3.4 Symptom: The system is making gurgling noises after commissioning

Possible cause Corrective action
There is air in the system. Purge air from the system.(a)
Incorrect hydraulic balance. To be performed by the installer:
1 Perform hydraulic balancing to
assure that the flow is correctly
distributed between the emitters.
2 If hydraulic balancing is not
sufficient, change the pump
limitation settings ([9-0D] and [9-0E]
if applicable).
Various malfunctions. Check if or is displayed on the
home screen of the user interface. See
"14.4.1 To display the help text in case
of a malfunction" [4191] for more
information about the malfunction.
(a)
We recommend to purge air with the air purge function of the unit (to be performed by
the installer). If you purge air from the heat emitters or collectors, mind the following:

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 187
14 | Troubleshooting

WARNING
Air purging heat emitters or collectors. Before you purge air from heat emitters or
collectors, check if or is displayed on the home screen of the user interface.
▪ If not, you can purge air immediately.
▪ If yes, make sure that the room where you want to purge air is sufficiently
ventilated. Reason: Refrigerant might leak into the water circuit, and
subsequently into the room when you purge air from the heat emitters or
collectors.

14.3.5 Symptom: The pump is making noise (cavitation)

Possible causes Corrective action
There is air in the system Purge air manually (see "To perform a
manual air purge" [4172]) or use the
automatic air purge function (see "To
perform an automatic air
purge" [4172]).
The water pressure at the pump inlet is Check and make sure that:
too low ▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The water pressure sensor is not
broken.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT broken.
▪ The valve (if equipped) of the water
circuit towards the expansion vessel is
open.
▪ The pre-pressure setting of the
expansion vessel is correct (see
"8.1.4 Changing the pre-pressure of
the expansion vessel" [476]).

14.3.6 Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens

Possible causes Corrective action
The expansion vessel is broken Replace the expansion vessel.
The valve (if equipped) of the water Open the valve.
circuit towards the expansion vessel is
closed.
The water volume in the installation is Make sure that the water volume in the
too high installation is below the maximum
allowed value (see "8.1.3 To check the
water volume and flow rate" [473] and
"8.1.4 Changing the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel" [476]).

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
188 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 14 | Troubleshooting
Possible causes Corrective action
The water circuit head is too high The water circuit head is the difference
in height between the indoor unit and
the highest point of the water circuit. If
the indoor unit is located at the highest
point of the installation, the installation
height is considered 0 m. The maximum
water circuit head is 10 m.
Check the installation requirements.

14.3.7 Symptom: The water pressure relief valve leaks

Possible causes Corrective action
Dirt is blocking the water pressure relief Check whether the pressure relief valve
valve outlet works correctly by turning the red knob
on the valve counterclockwise:
▪ If you do NOT hear a clacking sound,
contact your dealer.
▪ If the water keeps running out of the
unit, close both the water inlet and
outlet shut-off valves first and then
contact your dealer.

14.3.8 Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently heated at low outdoor temperatures
Possible causes Corrective action
The backup heater operation is not Check the following:
activated ▪ The backup heater operation mode is
enabled.
Go to: [9.3.8]: Installer
settings > Backup heater >
Operation [4‑00]
▪ The backup heater overcurrent circuit
breaker is on. If not, turn it back on.
▪ The thermal protector of the backup
heater is NOT activated. If it has,
check the following, and then press
the reset button in the switch box:
- The water pressure
- Whether there is air in the system
- The air purge operation
The backup heater equilibrium Increase the equilibrium temperature to
temperature has not been configured activate the backup heater operation at
correctly a higher outdoor temperature.
Go to: [9.3.7]: Installer settings
> Backup heater > Equilibrium
temperature [5‑01]

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 189
14 | Troubleshooting
Possible causes Corrective action
There is air in the system. Purge air manually or automatically. See
the air purge function in the chapter
"11 Commissioning" [4169].
Too much heat pump capacity is used Check if the Space heating
for heating domestic hot water (applies priority settings have been
only to installations with a domestic hot configured appropriately:
water tank) ▪ Make sure that the Space heating
priority has been enabled.
Go to [9.6.1]: Installer
settings > Balancing > Space
heating priority [5‑02]
▪ Increase the "space heating priority
temperature" to activate backup
heater operation at a higher outdoor
temperature.
Go to [9.6.3]: Installer
settings > Balancing > Offset
BSH setpoint [5‑03]

14.3.9 Symptom: The pressure at the tapping point is temporarily unusually high
Possible causes Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief valve. ▪ Flush and clean the complete tank
including the piping between pressure
relief valve and the cold water inlet.
▪ Replace the pressure relief valve.

14.3.10 Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed away due to a swollen tank
Possible causes Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief valve. Contact your local dealer.

14.3.11 Symptom: Tank disinfection function is NOT completed correctly (AH-error)

Possible causes Corrective action
The disinfection function was Program the start-up of the disinfection
interrupted by domestic hot water function when the coming 4 hours NO
tapping domestic hot water tapping is expected.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
190 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 14 | Troubleshooting
Possible causes Corrective action
Large domestic hot water tapping If in [5.6] Tank > Heat up mode the
happened recently before the mode Reheat only or Schedule +
programmed start-up of the disinfection reheat is selected, it is recommended
function to program the start-up of the
disinfection function at least 4 hours
later than the last expected large hot
water tapping. This start-up can be set
by installer settings (disinfection
function).
If in [5.6] Tank > Heat up mode the
mode Schedule only is selected, it is
recommended to program a Eco action
3 hours before the scheduled start-up
of the disinfection function to preheat
the tank.
The disinfection operation was stopped Do NOT stop tank operation during
manually: [C.3] Operation > Tank was disinfection.
turned off during disinfection.

14.4 Solving problems based on error codes

If the unit runs into a problem, the user interface displays an error code. It is
important to understand the problem and to take measures before resetting an
error code. This should be done by a licensed installer or by your local dealer.
This chapter gives you an overview of all possible error codes and their descriptions
as they appear on the user interface.
For detailed troubleshooting of each error, see the service manual.

14.4.1 To display the help text in case of a malfunction

In case of a malfunction, the following will appear on the home screen depending
on the severity:
▪ : Error
▪ : Malfunction
You can get a short and a long description of the malfunction as follows:
1 Press the left dial to open the main menu and go to
Malfunctioning.
Result: A short description of the error and the error code is
displayed on the screen.
2 Press in the error screen.
Result: A long description of the error is displayed on the
screen.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 191
14 | Troubleshooting
14.4.2 Error codes: Overview

Error codes of the unit

Error code Detailed error code Description
7H 01 Water flow problem
7H 04 Water flow problem during
domestic hot water production
7H 05 Water flow problem during
heating/sampling
7H 06 Water flow problem during
cooling/defrost
7H 07 Water flow problem. Pump
deblocking active
80 01 Entering water thermistor
abnormality of outdoor unit
81 00 Leaving water temperature
sensor problem
81 06 Entering water temperature
thermistor abnormality
(indoor unit)
89 01 Heat exchanger freeze-up
protection activated during
defrost (error)
89 02 Heat exchanger freeze-up
protection activated during
heating / DHW
89 03 Heat exchanger freeze-up
protection activated during
defrost (warning)
89 05 Heat exchanger freeze-up
protection activated during
cooling (error)
89 06 Heat exchanger freeze-up
protection activated during
defrost (warning)
8F 00 Abnormal increase outlet
water temperature (DHW)
8H 00 Abnormal increase outlet
water temperature
8H 03 Overheating water circuit
(thermostat)
A1 00 Zero cross detection problem
A5 00 OU: High pressure peak cut /
freeze protection problem
AA 01 Backup heater overheated or
BUH power cable not connected

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
192 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 14 | Troubleshooting
Error code Detailed error code Description
AA 02 External backup heater
overheated
AC 00 Booster heater overheated
AH 00 Tank disinfection function
not completed correctly
AJ 03 Too long DHW heat-up time
required
C0 00 Flow sensor malfunction
C0 01 Flow switch malfunction
C0 02 Flow switch malfunction
C4 00 Heat exchanger temperature
sensor problem
C5 00 Heat exchanger thermistor
abnormality
CJ 02 Room temperature sensor
problem
E1 00 OU: PCB defect
E2 00 Leakage current detection
error
E3 00 OU: Actuation of high
pressure switch (HPS)
E4 00 Abnormal suction pressure
E5 00 OU: Overheat of inverter
compressor motor
E6 00 OU: Compressor startup defect
E7 00 OU: Malfunction of outdoor
unit fan motor
E8 00 OU: Power input overvoltage
E9 00 Malfunction of electronic
expansion valve
EA 00 OU: Cool/heat switchover
problem
EC 00 Abnormal increase tank
temperature
EC 04 Tank preheating
F3 00 OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe temperature
F6 00 OU: Abnormal high pressure in
cooling
FA 00 OU: Abnormal high pressure,
actuation of HPS

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 193
14 | Troubleshooting
Error code Detailed error code Description
H0 00 OU: Voltage/current sensor
problem
H1 00 External temperature sensor
problem
H3 00 OU: Malfunction of high
pressure switch (HPS)
H4 00 Malfunction of low pressure
switch
H5 00 Malfunction of compressor
overload protection
H6 00 OU: Malfunction of position
detection sensor
H8 00 OU: Malfunction of compressor
input (CT) system
H9 00 OU: Malfunction of outdoor
air thermistor
HC 00 Tank temperature sensor
problem
HJ 10 Water pressure sensor
abnormality
HJ 11 Boiler abnormality detection
J3 00 OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe thermistor
J5 00 Malfunction of suction pipe
thermistor
J6 00 OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor
J6 07 OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor
J6 32 Leaving water temperature
thermistor Abnormality
(outdoor unit)
J6 33 Sensor communication error
J8 00 Malfunction of refrigerant
liquid thermistor
JA 00 OU: Malfunction of high
pressure sensor
JA 17 Refrigerant pressure sensor
abnormality
L1 00 Malfunction of INV PCB
L3 00 OU: Electrical box
temperature rise problem

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
194 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 14 | Troubleshooting
Error code Detailed error code Description
L4 00 OU: Malfunction of inverter
radiating fin temperature
rise
L5 00 OU: Inverter instantaneous
overcurrent (DC)
L8 00 Malfunction triggered by a
thermal protection in the
inverter PCB
L9 00 Prevention of compressor lock
LC 00 Malfunction in communication
system of outdoor unit
P1 00 Open-phase power supply
imbalance
P3 00 Abnormal direct current
P4 00 OU: Malfunction of radiating
fin temperature sensor
PJ 00 Capacity setting mismatch
U0 00 OU: Shortage of refrigerant
U1 00 Malfunction by reverse phase/
open-phase
U2 00 OU: Defect of power supply
voltage
U3 00 Underfloor heating screed
dryout function not completed
correctly
U4 00 Indoor/outdoor unit
communication problem
U5 00 User interface communication
problem
U7 00 OU: Transmission malfunction
between main CPU- INV CPU
U8 01 Connection with LAN adapter
lost
U8 02 Connection with room
thermostat lost
U8 03 No connection with room
thermostat
U8 04 Unknown USB device
U8 05 File malfunction
U8 07 P1P2 communication error
UA 00 Indoor unit, outdoor unit
matching problem
UA 17 Tank type problem

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 195
14 | Troubleshooting
Error code Detailed error code Description
UA 21 Extension/hydro mismatch
problem
UA 22 Communication problem between
control box and option box
UF 00 Reversed piping or bad
communication wiring
detection

INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the disinfection function occurred
due to domestic hot water tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Reheat only or Schedule + reheat mode is selected, it is
recommended to program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water tapping. This start-up can be
set by installer settings (disinfection function).
▪ When the Schedule only mode is selected, it is recommended to program an
Eco action 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the disinfection function to
preheat the tank.

NOTICE
When the minimum water flow is lower than described in the table below, the unit
will temporarily stop operation and the user interface will display error 7H‑01. After
some time, this error will reset automatically and the unit will resume operation.

Minimum required flow rate

20 l/min

INFORMATION
Error AJ-03 is reset automatically from the moment there is a normal tank heat-up.

INFORMATION
In case of an E7‑62 error, brine pump operation stops due to not enough flow in the
brine circuit. If 10‑day brine pump operation is running, it will stop running and will
only resume once the error is reset. It is only possible to reset the error with the
domestic hot water home screen or the leaving water temperature home screen
turned ON. To reset the error, press and confirm by pressing .

INFORMATION
If an U8‑04 error occurs, the error can be reset after a successful update of the
software. If the software is not successfully updated then you must make sure that
your USB device has the FAT32 format.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
196 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 14 | Troubleshooting

INFORMATION
If the booster heater overheats and is disabled by the thermostatic safety, the unit
will not give an error directly. Check if the booster heater is still in operation if you
experience one or more of the following errors:
▪ Powerful operation takes a very long time to heat up and the error code AJ-03 is
displayed.
▪ During anti-legionella operation (weekly), the error code AH-00 is displayed
because the unit cannot reach the requested temperature required for tank
disinfection.

INFORMATION
A malfunctioning booster heater will have an impact on energy metering and power
consumption control.

INFORMATION
The user interface will display how to reset an error code.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 197
15 | Disposal

15 Disposal
NOTICE
Do NOT try to dismantle the system yourself: dismantling of the system, treatment of
the refrigerant, oil and other parts MUST comply with applicable legislation. Units
MUST be treated at a specialised treatment facility for reuse, recycling and recovery.

In this chapter
15.1 To recover refrigerant ............................................................................................................................................................ 198
15.1.1 To open the stop valves ......................................................................................................................................... 199
15.1.2 To manually open the electronic expansion valves............................................................................................... 199
15.1.3 Recovery mode....................................................................................................................................................... 200

15.1 To recover refrigerant

When disposing of the outdoor unit, you need to recover its refrigerant.
To ensure that no refrigerant remains trapped in the unit:
▪ Make sure the stop valves are open (a, b).
▪ Make sure the valves (Y1E, Y3E, Y2S, Y3S) are open.
▪ Use all 3 service ports (a, b, c) to recover refrigerant.
Components

Y2S + Y3S

a b
Y1E
Y3E

a Liquid stop valve with service port

b Gas stop valve with service port
c Service port 5/16" flare
Y1E Electronic expansion valve (main)
Y3E Electronic expansion valve (injection)
Y2S Solenoid valve (injection bypass)
Y3S Solenoid valve (hot gas bypass)

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
198 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 15 | Disposal
To recover refrigerant when power is ON
1 Make sure the unit is not running.
2 Make sure the stop valves are open (see "15.1.1 To open the stop
valves" [4199]).
3 Activate the recovery mode (see "15.1.3 Recovery mode" [4200]).
Result: The unit opens the electronic expansion valves.
4 Recover refrigerant from the 3 service ports.
5 Deactivate the recovery mode (see "15.1.3 Recovery mode" [4200]).
Result: The unit returns the electronic expansion valves to their initial state.
To recover refrigerant when power is OFF
1 Make sure the stop valves are open (see "15.1.1 To open the stop
valves" [4199]).
2 Manually open the valves (Y*) (see "15.1.2 To manually open the electronic
expansion valves" [4199]).
3 Recover refrigerant from the 3 service ports.

15.1.1 To open the stop valves

Before recovering refrigerant, make sure the stop valves are open.
a

a Service port and service port cover

b Stop valve
c Stop valve cover
1 Remove the stop valve cover.
2 Insert a hexagon wrench into the stop valve and turn counterclockwise to
open.

15.1.2 To manually open the electronic expansion valves

Before recovering refrigerant, make sure the electronic expansion valves are open.
When power is OFF, this has to be done manually.

c2 c3
1 2 3
c1

c1 Electronic expansion valve

c2 EEV coil
c3 EEV magnet
1 Remove the EEV coil (c2).
2 Slide an EEV magnet (c3) over the expansion valve (c1).

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 199
15 | Disposal
3 Turn the EEV magnet anticlockwise to the fully open position of the valve. If
you are not sure about what the open position is, turn the valve in its middle
position so that refrigerant can pass.

15.1.3 Recovery mode

Before recovering refrigerant, make sure the electronic expansion valves are open.
When power is ON, this has to be done by using the recovery mode.
Components
To activate/deactivate the recovery mode, you need the following components:

H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P

MODE TEST HWL L.N.O.P. DEMAND

BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4

MODE SET RETURN PUMP DOWN

H1P~H7P 7‑LEDs display

BS1~BS4 Push buttons. Operate the push buttons with an insulated stick (such as a closed
ballpoint pen) to avoid touching of live parts.

To activate the recovery mode

INFORMATION
If you get confused in the middle of the process, press BS1 to return to the default
situation.

Before recovering refrigerant, activate the recovery mode as follows:

# Action 7-LEDs display(a)
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
1 Start from the default situation.
2 Press and hold BS1 for 5 seconds.
3 Press BS2 9 times.
4 Press BS3 once.
5 Press BS2 once.
6 Press BS3 once.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
200 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 15 | Disposal
# Action 7-LEDs display(a)
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
7 Press BS3 once.
The flashing H1P indicates the
recovery mode has been correctly
selected and is activated.
8 Press BS1 once.
H1P keeps flashing, indicating that
you are in a mode that does not
allow compressor operation.
(a)
= OFF, = ON, and = flashing.

Result: The recovery mode is activated. The unit opens the electronic expansion
valves / solenoid valves.
To deactivate the recovery mode
After recovering refrigerant, deactivate the recovery mode as follows:
# Procedure 7-LEDs display(a)
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
1 Press and hold BS1 for 5 seconds.
2 Press BS2 9 times.
3 Press BS3 once.
4 Press BS2 once.
5 Press BS3 once.
6 Press BS3 once.
7 Press BS1 once to return to the
default situation.
(a)
= OFF, = ON, and = flashing.

Result: The recovery mode is deactivated. The unit returns the electronic
expansion valves / solenoid valves to their initial state.

INFORMATION
Power OFF. When power is turned OFF and turned ON again, the recovery mode is
deactivated automatically.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 201
16 | Technical data

16 Technical data
A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional Daikin website
(publicly accessible). The full set of latest technical data is available on the Daikin
Business Portal (authentication required).

16.1 Service space: Outdoor unit

Single unit
(mm)
A~E HB HD HU
a b c d e eB eD H
A, B, C — ≥500 ≥300 ≥100 ≥150
eB
A, B, C, E — ≥500 ≥300 ≥150 ≥1000 ≤500 ≥150
E D — ≥500 ≥150
eD
D, E — ≥500 ≥1000 ≤500 ≥150
e
B, D HD<HU ≥300 ≥500 ≥150
B, D, E HD<HU ≥300 ≥1000 ≥1000 ≤500 ≥150
C HU &
B
c b HB>HU
HB
HD>HU ≥300 ≥1000 ≥1000 ≤500 ≥150
&
d HB<HU
a
D A
HD

A,C Left side and right side obstacles (walls/baffle plates)

B Suction side obstacle (wall/baffle plate)
D Discharge side obstacle (wall/baffle plate)
E Top side obstacle (roof)
a,b,c,d,e Minimum service space between the unit and obstacles A, B, C, D and E
eB Maximum distance between the unit and the edge of obstacle E, in the direction of obstacle B
eD Maximum distance between the unit and the edge of obstacle E, in the direction of obstacle D
HU Height of the unit including the installation structure
HB,HD Height of obstacles B and D
H Height of installation structure below the unit

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
202 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 16 | Technical data

16.2 Piping diagram: Outdoor unit

B

e e
f f R4T
f f

g
h

Y1E n
e
M M1F

R6T
Y3S

R1T
A o
Y3E
p M M2F

c
S1NPH k
a R10T R5T

g
Y2S
d i
R9T l
b
R3T

S1PL
j
S1PH l
R7T
l
R2T
m
E1H

M1C

A Water side E1H Crankcase heater

B Refrigerant side M1C Compressor
M1F Upper fan motor
a Water OUT, male 1" M2F Lower fan motor
b Water IN, male 1" R1T Thermistor (outdoor air)
c Gas stop valve with service port R2T Thermistor (compressor discharge)
d Liquid stop valve with service port R3T Thermistor (compressor suction)
e Refrigerant filter R4T Thermistor (air heat exchanger liquid pipe)
f One-way valve R5T Thermistor (air heat exchanger middle)
g Capillary tube R6T Thermistor (refrigerant liquid)
h Heat exchanger R7T Thermistor (compressor protection)
i Distributor R9T Thermistor (entering water)
j Service port 5/16" flare R10T Thermistor (leaving water)
k 4-way valve S1PH High pressure switch
l Muffler S1PL Low pressure switch
m Accumulator S1NPH High pressure sensor
n Economiser heat exchanger Y1E Electronic expansion valve (main)
o Inverter PCB heat sink Y2S Solenoid valve (injection bypass)
p Plate heat exchanger Y3E Electronic expansion valve (injection)
Y3S Solenoid valve (hot gas bypass)

Heating
Cooling

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 203
16 | Technical data

16.3 Piping diagram: Indoor unit

A

h S1L B1PW

B c
R2T
a
e k j
i

d
g

B
R1T B1L
b
e k
f

3D120613B

A Indoor unit
B Field installed
a Space heating water OUT
b Water IN connection
c Pump
d Expansion vessel
e Shut-off valve, male-female 1"
f Magnetic filter/dirt separator
g Safety valve
h Air purge
i Drain valve
j Backup heater
k Loose nut 1"
B1L Flow sensor
B1PW Space heating water pressure sensor
R1T Thermistor (water IN)
R2T Thermistor (backup heater – water OUT)
S1L Flow switch
Screw connection
Flare connection
Quick coupling
Brazed connection

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
204 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 16 | Technical data

16.4 Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit

The wiring diagram is delivered with the unit, located at the inside of the service
cover.
(1) Connection diagram
English Translation
Connection diagram Connection diagram
Only for *** Only for ***
See note *** See note ***
Outdoor Outdoor
Indoor Indoor
Position of compressor terminal Position of compressor terminal
Position in switch box Position in switch box
Front Front
Right Right
Back Back
Upper Upper
Lower Lower
Fan Fan
ON ON
OFF OFF

(2) Notes
English Translation
Notes Notes
L Live
N Neutral
Connection
Connector
Earth wiring
Field supply
Protective earth
Noiseless earth
Field wire
Terminal
Terminal strip
Wiring depending on model
Option
Switch box

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 205
16 | Technical data
English Translation
PCB
NOTES:
1 Colours: BLK: black, RED: red, BLU: blue, WHT: white, GRN: green, YLW:
yellow, PNK: pink, ORG: orange.
2 This wiring diagram applies only to the outdoor unit.
3 When operating, do not short-circuit protective devices S1PH and S1PL
4 Refer to the combination table and the option manual for how to connect
the wiring to X6A, X4A and X41A.
5 Refer to the service manual for instructions on how to set the selector
switches (DS1). The factory setting of all switches is OFF.

(3) Legend
English Translation
Legend Legend
Field supply Field supply
Optional Optional
Part n° Part n°
Description Description

A1P Printed circuit board (main)

A2P Printed circuit board (noise filter)
A3P Printed circuit board (leakage current)
A4P Printed circuit board (ACS)
BS1~BS4 (A1P) Push button switch
C1~C4 (A1P, A2P) Capacitor
DS1 (A1P) Dipswitch
E1H Crankcase heater
E2H Bottom plate heater (option)
E3H~E5H Plate heat exchanger heaters
F1U~F4U (A2P) Fuse
F6U (A1P) Fuse (T 5.0 A / 250 V)
H1P~H7P (A1P) Light-emitting diode (service monitor is orange)
HAP (A1P) Light-emitting diode (service monitor is green)
K1R (A1P) Magnetic relay (Y1S)
K1R (A4P) Magnetic relay (E3H~E5H)
K2R (A1P) Magnetic relay (Y2S)
K2R (A4P) Magnetic relay (E2H)
K3R (A1P) Magnetic relay (Y3S)
K4R (A1P) Magnetic relay (E1H)

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
206 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 16 | Technical data
K10R (A1P) Magnetic relay
K11M (A1P) Magnetic contactor
K13R~K15R (A1P, A2P) Magnetic relay
L1R~L3R (A1P) Reactor
M1C Compressor motor
M1F~M2F Fan motor
PS (A1P) Switching power supply
Q1DI Earth leakage circuit breaker (30 mA) (field
supply)
R1~R5 (A1P, A2P) Resistor
R1T Thermistor (outdoor air)
R2T Thermistor (compressor discharge)
R3T Thermistor (compressor suction)
R4T Thermistor (air heat exchanger liquid pipe)
R5T Thermistor (air heat exchanger middle)
R6T Thermistor (refrigerant liquid)
R7T Thermistor (compressor protection)
R9T Thermistor (entering water)
R10T Thermistor (leaving water)
R11T Thermistor (fin)
RC (A2P) Signal receiver circuit
S1NPH High pressure sensor
S1PH High pressure switch
S1PL Low pressure switch
T1A Current sensor
TC (A2P) Signal transmission circuit
V1D~V4D (A1P) Diode
V1R (A1P) IGBT power module
V2R (A1P) Diode module
V1T~V3T (A1P) Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT)
X1M Terminal strip
Y1E Electronic expansion valve (main)
Y3E Electronic expansion valve (injection)
Y1S Solenoid valve (4‑way valve)
Y2S Solenoid valve (injection bypass)
Y3S Solenoid valve (hot gas bypass)
Z1C~Z11C Noise filter (ferrite core)
Z1F~Z6F (A1P, A2P) Noise filter

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 207
16 | Technical data

16.5 Wiring diagram: Indoor unit

See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the indoor unit upper front panel). The
abbreviations used are listed below.

Notes to go through before starting the unit

English Translation
Notes to go through before starting Notes to go through before starting the
the unit unit
X1M Main terminal
X2M Field wiring terminal for AC
X5M Field wiring terminal for DC
X6M Backup heater power supply terminal
X7M/X8M Booster heater power supply terminal
Earth wiring
Field supply
1 Several wiring possibilities
Option
Not mounted in switch box
Wiring depending on model
PCB
Note 1: Connection point of the power Note 1: Connection point of the power
supply for the BUH/BSH should be supply for the backup heater should be
foreseen outside the unit. foreseen outside the unit.
Backup heater power supply Backup heater power supply
3V3 (1N~, 230 V, 3 kW) 3V3 (3~, 230 V, 6 kW)
6T1 (3~, 230 V, 6 kW) 6T1 (3~, 230 V, 6 kW)
6V3 (1N~, 230 V, 6 kW) 6V3 (1N~, 230 V, 6 kW)
6WN (3N~, 400 V, 6 kW)/9WN (3N~, 6WN/9WN (3N~, 400 V, 6 kW)
400 V, 9 kW)
User installed options User installed options
LAN adapter LAN adapter
Domestic hot water tank Domestic hot water tank
Remote user interface User interface used as room
thermostat
Ext. indoor thermistor External indoor thermistor
Ext outdoor thermistor External outdoor thermistor
Digital I/O PCB Digital I/O PCB
Demand PCB Demand PCB
Bottom plate heater Bottom plate heater
Main LWT Main leaving water temperature

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
208 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 16 | Technical data
English Translation
On/OFF thermostat (wired) On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless) On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
Ext. thermistor External thermistor
Heat pump convector Heat pump convector
Safety thermostat Safety thermostat
Add LWT Additional leaving water temperature
On/OFF thermostat (wired) On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless) On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
Ext. thermistor External thermistor
Heat pump convector Heat pump convector

Position in switch box

English Translation
Position in switch box Position in switch box

Legend
A1P Main PCB
A2P * On/OFF thermostat (PC=power circuit)
A3P * Heat pump convector
A4P * Digital I/O PCB
A8P * Demand PCB
A10P MMI (= user interface connected to the indoor unit) –
Power supply unit PCB
A11P MMI (= user interface connected to the indoor unit) –
Main PCB
A13P * LAN adapter
A14P * User interface PCB
A15P * Receiver PCB (wireless On/OFF thermostat)
BSK (A3P) * Solar pump station relay
CN* (A4P) * Connector
DS1(A8P) * DIP switch
F1B # Overcurrent fuse backup heater
F2B # Overcurrent fuse booster heater
F1U, F2U (A4P) * Fuse 5 A 250 V for digital I/O PCB
K1M, K2M Contactor backup heater
K3M Contactor booster heater
K5M Safety contactor backup heater
K*R (A4P) Relay on PCB
M2P # Domestic hot water pump

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 209
16 | Technical data
M2S # 2-way valve for cooling mode
M3S # 3-way valve for floorheating/domestic hot water
PC (A15P) * Power circuit
PHC1 (A4P) * Optocoupler input circuit
Q2L Thermal protector booster heater
Q4L # Safety thermostat
Q*DI # Earth leakage circuit breaker
R1H (A2P) * Humidity sensor
R1T (A2P) * Ambient sensor On/OFF thermostat
R2T (A2P) * External sensor (floor or ambient)
R6T * External indoor or outdoor ambient thermistor
S1S # Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
S2S # Electricity meter pulse input 1
S3S # Electricity meter pulse input 2
S6S~S9S * Digital power limitation inputs
SS1 (A4P) * Selector switch
TR1 Power supply transformer
X6M # Backup heater power supply terminal strip
X7M/X8M # Booster heater power supply terminal strip
X*, X*A, X*Y, Y* Connector
X*M Terminal strip
* Optional
# Field supply

Translation of text on wiring diagram

English Translation
(1) Main power connection (1) Main power connection
For preferential kWh rate power supply For preferential kWh rate power supply
Indoor unit supplied from outdoor Indoor unit supplied from outdoor
Normal kWh rate power supply Normal kWh rate power supply
Only for normal power supply Only for normal power supply
(standard) (standard)
Only for preferential kWh rate power Only for preferential kWh rate power
supply (outdoor) supply (outdoor)
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit
Preferential kWh rate power supply Preferential kWh rate power supply
contact: 16 V DC detection (voltage contact: 16 V DC detection (voltage
supplied by PCB) supplied by PCB)
SWB Switch box
Use normal kWh rate power supply for Use normal kWh rate power supply for
indoor unit indoor unit

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
210 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 16 | Technical data
English Translation
(2) Backup heater power supply (2) Backup heater power supply
Only for *** Only for ***
(3) User interface (3) User interface
Only for LAN adapter Only for the LAN adapter
Only for remote user interface Only for the user interface used as
EKRUDAS room thermostat (EKRUDAS)
(4) Domestic hot water tank (4) Domestic hot water tank
3 wire type SPST 3 wire type SPST
Booster heater power supply Booster heater power supply
Only for *** Only for ***
SWB Switch box
(5) Ext. thermistor (5) External thermistor
SWB Switch box
(6) Field supplied options (6) Field supplied options
12 V DC pulse detection (voltage 12 V DC pulse detection (voltage
supplied by PCB) supplied by PCB)
230 V AC supplied by PCB 230 V AC supplied by PCB
Continuous Continuous current
DHW pump output Domestic hot water pump output
DHW pump Domestic hot water pump
Electrical meters Electricity meters
For safety thermostat For safety thermostat
Inrush Inrush current
Max. load Maximum load
Normally closed Normally closed
Normally open Normally open
Safety thermostat contact: 16 V DC Safety thermostat contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by PCB) detection (voltage supplied by PCB)
Shut-off valve Shut-off valve
SWB Switch box
(7) Option PCBs (7) Option PCBs
Alarm output Alarm output
Changeover to ext. heat source Changeover to external heat source
Max. load Maximum load
Min. load Minimum load
Only for demand PCB option Only for demand PCB option
Only for digital I/O PCB option Only for digital I/O PCB option

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 211
16 | Technical data
English Translation
Options: ext. heat source output, solar Options: external heat source output,
pump connection, alarm output solar pump connection, alarm output
Options: On/OFF output Options: On/OFF output
Power limitation digital inputs: 12 V Power limitation digital inputs:
DC / 12 mA detection (voltage supplied 12 V DC / 12 mA detection (voltage
by PCB) supplied by PCB)
Refer to operation manual Refer to operation manual
Solar input Solar input
Solar pump connection Solar pump connection
Space C/H On/OFF output Space cooling/heating On/OFF output
SWB Switch box
(8) External On/OFF thermostats and (8) External On/OFF thermostats and
heat pump convector heat pump convector
Additional LWT zone Additional leaving water temperature
zone
Main LWT zone Main leaving water temperature zone
Only for external sensor (floor/ambient) Only for external sensor (floor or
ambient)
Only for heat pump convector Only for heat pump convector
Only for wired On/OFF thermostat Only for wired On/OFF thermostat
Only for wireless On/OFF thermostat Only for wireless On/OFF thermostat

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
212 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 16 | Technical data
Electrical connection diagram
For more details, please check the unit wiring.
Power supply Standard part
1 Only for normal power supply installation Notes:
unit power supply: 230 V + earth 3 core
- In case of signal cable: keep minimum distance to power cables >5 cm
Outdoor unit - Available heaters depending on model: see combination table
1 Only for preferential kWh rate power supply installation
unit preferential kWh rate power supply:
230 V + earth 3 core
X1M: L-N-earth

normal kWh rate power supply for indoor unit: 230 V 3 core

2 core
2x0.75
2 Preferential kWh rate power supply contact X4A + earth Bottom Plate Heater
X1M: 1-2-3
Field supply
2 Safety thermostat 3 core

backup heater power supply (6/9 kW): 400 V or 230 V + earth

(F1B) Indoor unit
Field supply
5 or 4 or 3 X1M: 1-2-3
Optional parts (*KHW*) core
Only for *KRP1HB*
booster heater power supply (3 kW): 400 V or 230 V + earth X2M: 5-6 A4P: Y1-YC 2 core
(F2B) X2M: 7-9 Alarm indication
X5M: 9-10 Alarm output 230 V
3 core
X6M: L1-L2-L3 + earth A4P: X1-X2 2 core
or L-N + earth Changeover to Ext. heat source (e.g. boiler)
Domestic hot or L1-L2-L3-N + earth ext. heat source output signal
water tank X8M: L-N + earth A4P: Y2-YC 2 core
or L1-L2 + earth X2M: 7-9 Cooling/heating
or L1/L2/L3-N + earth Cooling/heating 230 V On/OFF output
On/OFF output
A4P: Y3-YC 2 core Only for *KSR3PA option
X2M: 7-9 BSK: A3P: 1-2 solar interlock
Solar input 230 V
XM2: 10 2 core
X2M: 1-2 Circulation pump
XM2: 11a 230 V for DHW
2-way valve
3 core NO valve: X2M: 21-28 2 core M2S
3Gx2.5 NC valve: X2M: 21-29 for cooling mode
Booster heater X6M X7M: L-N + earth 230 V
230 V 2 core Electricity meter
X5M: 5-6
signal pulse input 1
2 core Electricity meter
R5T - thermistor 2 core X5M: 3-4
X9A (PCB A1P) signal pulse input 2
water temperature signal
Only for KRCS01-1 or EKRSCA1
2 core external thermistor
X5M: 7-8
(indoor or outdoor)
signal
External room thermostat / Heat pump convector
(main and/or additional zone) Optional parts
3-way valve 3 core for C/H operation Only for *KRTW
3 core 3 2 core for H only operation (wired room thermostat)
M3S (when *KHW is installed) SPST:
selection domestic hot water-floor heating X2M: 12-13-14a main: X2M: 30-34-35
230 V add: X2M: 30-34a-35a A2P: X1M: C-com-H
signal
3 5 core for C/H operation
Only for *KRTR 2 core
Field supply 4 core for H only operation (wireless room thermostat) (3m included)
Only for *KRTETS
Only for *KRP1AHTA main: X2M: 30-31-34-35 A15P: X1M: H-C-com R2T
add: X2M: 30-31-34a-35a X2M: L-N A2P: X1M: 1-3 External sensor
signal signal (floor or ambient)
Power limitation 2 core
demand input 1 A8P: X801M: 1-5
signal 3 main: X2M: 30-35
Only for
(heat pump convector)
Power limitation 2 core add: X2M: 30-35a 4 core
demand input 2 A8P: X801M: 2-5 A3P: X11M: 3-4-5-6
signal signal
2 core main & add: X2M: 3-4
Power limitation A8P: X801M: 3-5
demand input 3
signal
2 core
2 core
Only for BRC1HH* Optional parts
Power limitation A8P: X801M: 4-5 2x0.75
demand input 4 X5M: 11-12 A14P: P1-P2 user interface
signal communication
2 core
2x0.75
A13P: P1-P2 LAN adapter
communication

4D120628A

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 213
16 | Technical data

16.6 ESP curve: Indoor unit

Note: A flow error will occur when the minimum water flow rate is not reached.
A (kPa)
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30 C
20
10
0 B
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
B (l/min)
4D121019

A External static pressure in the space heating/cooling circuit

B Water flow rate through the unit in the space heating/cooling circuit
C Operation range
Dashed lines: Operation area is extended to lower flow rates only in case the unit
operates with heat pump only. (Not in startup, no backup heater operation, no
defrost operation.)
Notes:
▪ Selecting a flow outside the operating area can damage the unit or cause the unit
to malfunction. See also the minimum and maximum allowed water flow range in
the technical specifications.
▪ Make sure water quality complies with EU directive 2020/2184.

Installer reference guide EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7)

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
214 4P556069-1B – 2021.09
 17 | Glossary

17 Glossary
Dealer
Sales distributor for the product.
Authorised installer
Technical skilled person who is qualified to install the product.
User
Person who is owner of the product and/or operates the product.
Applicable legislation
All international, European, national and local directives, laws, regulations
and/or codes that are relevant and applicable for a certain product or
domain.
Service company
Qualified company which can perform or coordinate the required service to
the product.
Installation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or application, explaining
how to install, configure and maintain it.
Operation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or application, explaining
how to operate it.
Maintenance instructions
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or application, which
explains (if relevant) how to install, configure, operate and/or maintain the
product or application.
Accessories
Labels, manuals, information sheets and equipment that are delivered with
the product and that need to be installed according to the instructions in
the accompanying documentation.
Optional equipment
Equipment made or approved by Daikin that can be combined with the
product according to the instructions in the accompanying documentation.
Field supply
Equipment NOT made by Daikin that can be combined with the product
according to the instructions in the accompanying documentation.

EPGA11~16DAV3(7) + EABH/X16DF6V(7)+9W(7) Installer reference guide

Daikin Altherma 3 H W
4P556069-1B – 2021.09 215
 1/11

Field settings table [8.7.5] = .... 8291

[8.7.5] = .... 8293

Applicable indoor units

[8.7.5] = .... 8291 [8.7.5] = .... 8293

EABH16DF6V EABH16DF6V7
EABH16DF9W EABH16DF9W7
EABX16DF6V EABX16DF6V7
EABX16DF9W EABX16DF9W7
EAVH16S18DA6V(G) EAVH16S18DA6V7
EAVH16S23DA6V(G) EAVH16S23DA6V7
EAVH16SU18DA6V(G) EAVH16SU18DA6V7
EAVH16SU23DA6V(G) EAVH16SU23DA6V7
EAVH16S18DA9W(G) EAVH16S18DA9W7
EAVH16S23DA9W(G) EAVH16S23DA9W7
EAVX16S18DA6V(G) EAVX16S18DA6V7
EAVX16S23DA6V(G) EAVX16S23DA6V7
EAVX16S18DA9W(G) EAVX16S18DA9W7
EAVX16S23DA9W(G) EAVX16S23DA9W7

Notes

(*1) *6V
(*2) *9W
(*3) EAB*
(*4) EAV*
(*5) *X*
(*6) *H*
(*7) EAV*18*
(*8) EAV*23*

4P556072-1C - 2021.02
2/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
Room
└─ Antifrost
1.4.1 [2-06] Activation R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1.4.2 [2-05] Room setpoint R/W 4~16°C, step: 1°C
8°C
└─ Setpoint range
1.5.1 [3-07] Heating minimum R/W 12~18°C, step: 0,5°C
12°C
1.5.2 [3-06] Heating maximum R/W 18~30°C, step: 0,5°C
30°C
1.5.3 [3-09] Cooling minimum R/W 15~25°C, step: 0,5°C
15°C
1.5.4 [3-08] Cooling maximum R/W 25~35°C, step: 0,5°C
35°C
Room
1.6 [2-09] Room sensor offset R/W -5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
1.7 [2-0A] Room sensor offset R/W -5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
Main zone
2.4 Setpoint mode 0: Fixed
1: WD heating, fixed cooling
2: Weather dependent
└─ Heating WD curve
2.5 [1-00] Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W -40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
2.5 [1-01] High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
2.5 [1-02] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
2.5 [1-03] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
└─ Cooling WD curve
2.6 [1-06] Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
2.6 [1-07] High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W 25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
2.6 [1-08] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
2.6 [1-09] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
Main zone
2.7 [2-0C] Emitter type R/W 0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
└─ Setpoint range
2.8.1 [9-01] Heating minimum R/W 15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
2.8.2 [9-00] Heating maximum R/W [2-0C]=2:
37~60, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0C]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
2.8.3 [9-03] Cooling minimum R/W 5~18°C, step: 1°C
8°C
2.8.4 [9-02] Cooling maximum R/W 18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
Main zone
2.9 [C-07] Control R/W 0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
2.A [C-05] Thermostat type R/W 0: -
1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
└─ Delta T
2.B.1 [1-0B] Delta T heating R/W 3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
2.B.2 [1-0D] Delta T cooling R/W 3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
└─ Modulation
2.C.1 [8-05] Modulation R/W 0: No
1: Yes
2.C.2 [8-06] Max modulation R/W 0~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
└─ Shut off valve
2.D.1 [F-0B] During thermo R/W 0: No
1: Yes
2.D.2 [F-0C] During cooling R/W 0: No
1: Yes
Additional zone
3.4 Setpoint mode 0: Fixed
1: WD heating, fixed cooling
2: Weather dependent
└─ Heating WD curve
3.5 [0-00] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
3.5 [0-01] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
3.5 [0-02] High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
3.5 [0-03] Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W -40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
└─ Cooling WD curve
3.6 [0-04] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
3.6 [0-05] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
3.6 [0-06] High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W 25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
3.6 [0-07] Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
4P556072-1C - 2021.02 (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. (*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23*
 3/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
Additional zone
3.7 [2-0D] Emitter type R/W 0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
└─ Setpoint range
3.8.1 [9-05] Heating minimum R/W 15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
3.8.2 [9-06] Heating maximum R/W [2-0D]=2:
37~60, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0D]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
3.8.3 [9-07] Cooling minimum R/W 5~18°C, step: 1°C
8°C
3.8.4 [9-08] Cooling maximum R/W 18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
Additional zone
3.A [C-06] Thermostat type R/W 0: -
1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
└─ Delta T
3.B.1 [1-0C] Delta T heating R/W 3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3.B.2 [1-0E] Delta T cooling R/W 3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
Space heating / cooling
└─ Operation range
4.3.1 [4-02] Space heating OFF temp R/W 14~35°C, step: 1°C
35°C
4.3.2 [F-01] Space cooling OFF temp R/W 10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
Space heating / cooling
4.4 [7-02] Number of zones R/W 0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
4.5 [F-0D] Pump operation mode R/W 0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
4.6 [E-02] Unit type R/W (*5) 0: Reversible (*5)
R/O (*6) 1: Heating only (*6)

4.7 [9-0D] Pump speed limitation R/W 0~8, step:1

0: No limitation
1~4: 90~60% pump speed
5~8: 90~60% pump speed during
sampling
6
Space heating / cooling
4.9 [F-00] Pump outside range R/W 0: Restricted
1: Allowed
4.A [D-03] Increase around 0°C R/W 0: No
1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
4: increase 4°C, span 8°C
4.B [9-04] Overshoot R/W 1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
4.C [2-06] Antifrost R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Tank
5.2 [6-0A] Comfort setpoint R/W 30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
5.3 [6-0B] Eco setpoint R/W 30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
5.4 [6-0C] Reheat setpoint R/W 30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
5.6 [6-0D] Heat up mode R/W 0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
└─ Disinfection
5.7.1 [2-01] Activation R/W 0: No
1: Yes
5.7.2 [2-00] Operation day R/W 0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
5.7.3 [2-02] Start time R/W 0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
1
5.7.4 [2-03] Tank setpoint R/W [E-07]≠1 : 55~75°C, step: 5°C
70°C
[E-07]=1 : 60°C
60°C
5.7.5 [2-04] Duration R/W [E-07]≠1: 5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
[E-07]=1: 40~60 min, step: 5 min
40 min
Tank
5.8 [6-0E] Maximum R/W (*3) : 40~75°C, step: 1°C
60°C [E-07]=0
(*3) : 40~80°C, step: 1°C
80°C [E-07]=5
(*4) : 40~60°C, step: 1°C
60°C
5.9 [6-00] Hysteresis R/W 2~40°C, step: 1°C
28°C (*7)
22°C (*8)
20°C (*3)
5.A [6-08] Hysteresis R/W 2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
(*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23* (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. 4P556072-1C - 2021.02
4/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
5.B Setpoint mode R/W 0: Fixed
1: Weather dependent
└─ WD curve
5.C [0-0B] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve. R/W 35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
5.C [0-0C] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve. R/W 45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
5.C [0-0D] High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
5.C [0-0E] Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve. R/W -40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
Tank
5.D [6-01] Margin R/W 0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
User settings
└─ Quiet
7.4.1 Activation R/W 0: OFF
1: Quiet
2: More quiet
3: Most quiet
4: Automatic
└─ Electricity price
7.5.1 High R/W 0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
7.5.2 Medium R/W 0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
7.5.3 Low R/W 0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
User settings
7.6 Gas price R/W 0,00~990/kWh
0,00~290/MBtu
1,0/kWh
Installer settings
└─ Configuration wizard
└─ System
9.1 [E-03] BUH type R/O 3: 6V (*1)
4: 9W (*2)
9.1 [E-05] Domestic hot water R/W No DHW (*3)
[E-06] EKHW (*3)
[E-07] Integrated (*4)
EKHWP (*3)
9.1 [4-06] Emergency R/W 0: Manual
1: Automatic
9.1 [7-02] Number of zones R/W 0: Single zone
1: Dual zone
└─ Backup heater
9.1 [5-0D] Voltage R/W (*1) 0: 230V, 1~ (*1)
R/O (*2) 1: 230V, 3~ (*1)
2: 400V, 3~ (*2)
9.1 [4-0A] Configuration R/W 1: 1/1+2 (*1) (*2)
2: 1/2
3: 1/2 + 1/1+2 in emergency
9.1 [6-03] Capacity step 1 R/W 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
2kW (*1)
3kW (*2)
9.1 [6-04] Additional capacity step 2 R/W 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
4kW (*1)
6kW (*2)
└─ Main zone
9.1 [2-0C] Emitter type R/W 0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
9.1 [C-07] Control R/W 0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
9.1 Setpoint mode R/W 0: Fixed
1: WD heating, fixed cooling
2: Weather dependent
9.1 Schedule R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.1 [1-00] Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W -40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
9.1 [1-01] High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
9.1 [1-02] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
9.1 [1-03] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
9.1 [1-06] Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
9.1 [1-07] High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W 25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
9.1 [1-08] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
9.1 [1-09] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
└─ Additional zone
9.1 [2-0D] Emitter type R/W 0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
9.1 Setpoint mode R/W 0: Fixed
1: WD heating, fixed cooling
2: Weather dependent
9.1 Schedule R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.1 [0-00] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
9.1 [0-01] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
9.1 [0-02] High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
9.1 [0-03] Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W -40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
4P556072-1C - 2021.02 (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. (*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23*
 5/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
9.1 [0-04] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
9.1 [0-05] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
9.1 [0-06] High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W 25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
9.1 [0-07] Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
└─ Tank
9.1 [6-0D] Heat up mode R/W 0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
9.1 [6-0A] Comfort setpoint R/W 30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
9.1 [6-0B] Eco setpoint R/W 30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
9.1 [6-0C] Reheat setpoint R/W 30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
└─ Domestic hot water
9.2.1 [E-05] Domestic hot water R/W No DHW (*3)
[E-06] EKHW (*3)
[E-07] Integrated (*4)
EKHWP (*3)
9.2.2 [D-02] DHW pump R/W 0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. Shunt

9.2.4 [D-07] Solar R/W 0: No

1: Yes
└─ Back up heater
9.3.1 [E-03] BUH type R/O 3: 6V (*1)
4: 9W (*2)
9.3.2 [5-0D] Voltage R/W (*1) 0: 230V, 1~ (*1)
R/O (*2) 1: 230V, 3~ (*1)
2: 400V, 3~ (*2)
9.3.3 [4-0A] Configuration R/W 1: 1/1+2 (*1) (*2)
2: 1/2
3: 1/2 + 1/1+2 in emergency
9.3.4 [6-03] Capacity step 1 R/W 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
2kW (*1)
3kW (*2)
9.3.5 [6-04] Additional capacity step 2 R/W 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
4kW (*1)
6kW (*2)
9.3.6 [5-00] Equilibrium: Deactivate backup heater (or external backup heat source in case of a R/W 0: No
bivalent system) above the equilibrium temperature for space heating? 1: Yes

9.3.7 [5-01] Equilibrium temperature R/W -15~35°C, step: 1°C

0°C
9.3.8 [4-00] Operation R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Only DHW
└─ Booster heater
9.4.1 [6-02] Capacity R/W 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW (*3)
0kW (*4)
9.4.3 [8-03] BSH eco timer R/W 20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
9.4.4 [4-03] Operation R/W 0: Restricted
1: Allowed
2: Overlap
3: Compressor off
4: Legionella only
Installer settings
9.5 [4-06] Emergency R/W 0: Manual
1: Automatic
└─ Balancing
9.6.1 [5-02] Space heating priority R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
9.6.2 [5-03] Priority temperature R/W -15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
9.6.3 [5-04] Offset BSH setpoint R/W 0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
9.6.4 [8-02] Anti-recycle timer R/W 0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
0,5 hour [E-07]=1
3 hour [E-07]≠1
9.6.5 [8-00] Minimum running timer R/O 0~20 min, step 1 min
1 min
9.6.6 [8-01] Maximum running timer R/W 5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
9.6.7 [8-04] Additional timer R/W 0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
Installer settings
9.7 [4-04] Water pipe freeze prevention R/O 0: Intermittent
└─ Benefit kWh power supply
9.8.1 [D-01] Benefit kWh power supply R/W 0: No
1: Active open
2: Active closed
3: Safety thermostat
9.8.2 [D-00] Allow heater R/W 0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
9.8.3 [D-05] Allow pump R/W 0: Forced off
1: As normal
└─ Power consumption control
9.9.1 [4-08] Power consumption control R/W 0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
9.9.2 [4-09] Type R/W 0: Current
1: Power
9.9.3 [5-05] Limit R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
(*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23* (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. 4P556072-1C - 2021.02
6/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
9.9.4 [5-05] Limit 1 R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.9.5 [5-06] Limit 2 R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.9.6 [5-07] Limit 3 R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.9.7 [5-08] Limit 4 R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.9.8 [5-09] Limit R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.9.9 [5-09] Limit 1 R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.9.A [5-0A] Limit 2 R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.9.B [5-0B] Limit 3 R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.9.C [5-0C] Limit 4 R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.9.D [4-01] Priority heater 0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
└─ Energy metering
9.A.1 [D-08] Electricity meter 1 R/W 0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
9.A.2 [D-09] Electricity meter 2 R/W 0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
└─ Sensors
9.B.1 [C-08] External sensor R/W 0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
9.B.2 [2-0B] Ext. amb. sensor offset R/W -5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
9.B.3 [1-0A] Averaging time R/W 0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
└─ Bivalent
9.C.1 [C-02] Bivalent R/W 0: No
1: Bivalent
9.C.2 [7-05] Boiler efficiency R/W 0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
9.C.3 [C-03] Temperature R/W -25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
9.C.4 [C-04] Hysteresis R/W 2~10°C, step 1°C
3°C
Installer settings
9.D [C-09] Alarm output R/W 0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
9.E [3-00] Auto restart R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.F [E-08] Power saving function R/O 0: disabled
1: Enabled
9.G Disable protections R/W 0: No
1: Yes
└─ Overview field settings
9.I [0-00] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
9.I [0-01] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
9.I [0-02] High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
9.I [0-03] Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve. R/W -40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
9.I [0-04] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
9.I [0-05] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
9.I [0-06] High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W 25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
9.I [0-07] Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
9.I [0-0B] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve. R/W 35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
9.I [0-0C] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve. R/W 45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
9.I [0-0D] High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
9.I [0-0E] Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve. R/W -40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
9.I [1-00] Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W -40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
9.I [1-01] High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
9.I [1-02] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
9.I [1-03] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W [9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
9.I [1-04] Weather dependent cooling of the main leaving water temperature zone. R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
9.I [1-05] Weather dependent cooling of the additional leaving water temperature zone R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
4P556072-1C - 2021.02 (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. (*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23*
 7/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
9.I [1-06] Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W 10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
9.I [1-07] High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W 25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
9.I [1-08] Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
9.I [1-09] Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W [9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
9.I [1-0A] What is the averaging time for the outdoor temp? R/W 0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
9.I [1-0B] What is the desired delta T in heating for the main zone? R/W 3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
9.I [1-0C] What is the desired delta T in heating for the additional zone? R/W 3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
9.I [1-0D] What is the desired delta T in cooling for the main zone? R/W 3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
9.I [1-0E] What is the desired delta T in cooling for the additional zone? R/W 3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
9.I [2-00] When should the disinfection function be executed? R/W 0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
9.I [2-01] Should the disinfection function be executed? R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [2-02] When should the disinfection function start? R/W 0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
1
9.I [2-03] What is the disinfection target temperature? R/W [E-07]≠1 : 55~75°C, step: 5°C
70°C
[E-07]=1 : 60°C
60°C
9.I [2-04] How long must the tank temperature be maintained? R/W [E-07]≠1: 5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
[E-07]=1: 40~60 min, step: 5 min
40 min
9.I [2-05] Room antifrost temperature R/W 4~16°C, step: 1°C
8°C
9.I [2-06] Room frost protection R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
9.I [2-09] Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature R/W -5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
9.I [2-0A] Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature R/W -5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
9.I [2-0B] What is the required offset on the measured outdoor temp.? R/W -5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
9.I [2-0C] What emitter type is connected to the main LWT zone? R/W 0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
9.I [2-0D] What emitter type is connected to the additional LWT zone? R/W 0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
9.I [2-0E] What is the maximum allowed current over the heatpump ? R/W 20~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.I [3-00] Is auto restart of the unit allowed? R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [3-01] -- 0
9.I [3-02] -- 1
9.I [3-03] -- 4
9.I [3-04] -- 2
9.I [3-05] -- 1
9.I [3-06] What is the maximum desired room temperature in heating? R/W 18~30°C, step: 0,5°C
30°C
9.I [3-07] What is the mimimum desired room temperature in heating? R/W 12~18°C, step: 0,5°C
12°C
9.I [3-08] What is the maximum desired room temperature in cooling? R/W 25~35°C, step: 0,5°C
35°C
9.I [3-09] What is the minimum desired room temperature in cooling? R/W 15~25°C, step: 0,5°C
15°C
9.I [4-00] What is the BUH operation mode? R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Only DHW
9.I [4-01] Which electric heater has priority? R/W 0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
9.I [4-02] Below which outdoor temperature is heating allowed? R/W 14~35°C, step: 1°C
35°C
9.I [4-03] Operation permission of the booster heater. R/W 0: Restricted
1: Allowed
2: Overlap
3: Compressor off
4: Legionella only
9.I [4-04] Water pipe freeze prevention R/O 0: Intermittent
9.I [4-05] -- 0
9.I [4-06] Emergency R/W 0: Manual
1: Automatic
9.I [4-08] Which power limitation mode is required on the system? R/W 0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
9.I [4-09] Which power limitation type is required? R/W 0: Current
1: Power
9.I [4-0A] Backup heater configuration R/W 1: 1/1+2 (*1) (*2)
2: 1/2
3: 1/2 + 1/1+2 in emergency
9.I [4-0B] Automatic cooling/heating changeover hysteresis. R/W 1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
1°C
9.I [4-0D] Automatic cooling/heating changeover offset. R/W 1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
3°C

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
(*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23* (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. 4P556072-1C - 2021.02
8/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
9.I [5-00] Equilibrium: Deactivate backup heater (or external backup heat source in case of a R/W 0: No
bivalent system) above the equilibrium temperature for space heating? 1: Yes

9.I [5-01] What is the equilibrium temperature for the building? R/W -15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
9.I [5-02] Space heating priority. R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
9.I [5-03] Space heating priority temperature. R/W -15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
9.I [5-04] Set point correction for domestic hot water temperature. R/W 0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
9.I [5-05] What is the requested limit for DI1? R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.I [5-06] What is the requested limit for DI2? R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.I [5-07] What is the requested limit for DI3? R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.I [5-08] What is the requested limit for DI4? R/W 0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
9.I [5-09] What is the requested limit for DI1? R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.I [5-0A] What is the requested limit for DI2? R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.I [5-0B] What is the requested limit for DI3? R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.I [5-0C] What is the requested limit for DI4? R/W 0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
9.I [5-0D] Backup heater voltage R/W (*1) 0: 230V, 1~ (*1)
R/O (*2) 1: 230V, 3~ (*1)
2: 400V, 3~ (*2)
9.I [5-0E] -- 1
9.I [6-00] The temperature difference determining the heat pump ON temperature. R/W 2~40°C, step: 1°C
28°C (*7)
22°C (*8)
20°C (*3)
9.I [6-01] The temperature difference determining the heat pump OFF temperature. R/W 0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
9.I [6-02] What is the capacity of the booster heater? R/W 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW (*3)
0kW (*4)
9.I [6-03] What is the capacity of the backup heater step 1? R/W 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
2kW (*1)
3kW (*2)
9.I [6-04] What is the capacity of the backup heater step 2? R/W 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
4kW (*1)
6kW (*2)
9.I [6-05] -- 0
9.I [6-06] -- 0
9.I [6-07] -- 0
9.I [6-08] What is the hysteresis to be used in reheat mode? R/W 2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
9.I [6-09] -- 0
9.I [6-0A] What is the desired comfort storage temperature? R/W 30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
9.I [6-0B] What is the desired eco storage temperature? R/W 30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
9.I [6-0C] What is the desired reheat temperature? R/W 30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
9.I [6-0D] What is the desired DHW production type? R/W 0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
9.I [6-0E] What is the maximum temperature setpoint? R/W (*3) : 40~75°C, step: 1°C
60°C [E-07]=0
(*3) : 40~80°C, step: 1°C
80°C [E-07]=5
(*4) : 40~60°C, step: 1°C
60°C
9.I [7-00] Domestic hot water booster heater overshoot temperature. R/W 0~4°C, step: 1°C
0°C
9.I [7-01] Domestic hot water booster heater hysteresis. R/W 2~40°C, step: 1°C
2°C
9.I [7-02] How many leaving water temperature zones are there? R/W 0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
9.I [7-03] -- 2.5
9.I [7-04] -- 0
9.I [7-05] Boiler efficiency R/W 0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
9.I [8-00] Minimum running time for domestic hot water operation. R/O 0~20 min, step 1 min
1 min
9.I [8-01] Maximum running time for domestic hot water operation. R/W 5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
9.I [8-02] Anti-recycling time. R/W 0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
0,5 hour [E-07]=1
3 hour [E-07]≠1
9.I [8-03] Booster heater delay timer. R/W 20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
9.I [8-04] Additional running time for the maximum running time. R/W 0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
9.I [8-05] Allow modulation of the LWT to control the room temp? R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [8-06] Leaving water temperature maximum modulation. R/W 0~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
9.I [8-07] What is the desired comfort main LWT in cooling? R/W [9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
9.I [8-08] What is the desired eco main LWT in cooling? R/W [9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
9.I [8-09] What is the desired comfort main LWT in heating? R/W [9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
9.I [8-0A] What is the desired eco main LWT in heating? R/W [9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
33°C

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
4P556072-1C - 2021.02 (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. (*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23*
 9/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
9.I [8-0B] -- 13
9.I [8-0C] -- 10
9.I [8-0D] -- 16
9.I [9-00] What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in heating? R/W [2-0C]=2:
37~60, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0C]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
9.I [9-01] What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in heating? R/W 15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
9.I [9-02] What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in cooling? R/W 18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
9.I [9-03] What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in cooling? R/W 5~18°C, step: 1°C
8°C
9.I [9-04] Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature. R/W 1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
9.I [9-05] What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in heating? R/W 15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
9.I [9-06] What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in heating? R/W [2-0D]=2:
37~60, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0D]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
9.I [9-07] What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling? R/W 5~18°C, step: 1°C
8°C
9.I [9-08] What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling? R/W 18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
9.I [9-0C] Room temperature hysteresis. R/W 1~6°C, step: 0,5°C
1 °C
9.I [9-0D] Pump speed limitation R/W 0~8, step:1
0: No limitation
1~4: 90~60% pump speed
5~8: 90~60% pump speed during
sampling
6
9.I [9-0E] -- 6
9.I [C-00] Domestic heating water priority. R/W 0: Solar priority
1: Heat pump priority
9.I [C-01] -- 0
9.I [C-02] Is an external backup heat source connected? R/W 0: No
1: Bivalent
9.I [C-03] Bivalent activation temperature. R/W -25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
9.I [C-04] Bivalent hysteresis temperature. R/W 2~10°C, step 1°C
3°C
9.I [C-05] What is the thermo request contact type for the main zone? R/W 0: -
1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
9.I [C-06] What is the thermo request contact type for the add. zone? R/W 0: -
1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
9.I [C-07] What is the unit control method in space operation? R/W 0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
9.I [C-08] Which type of external sensor is installed? R/W 0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
9.I [C-09] What is the required alarm output contact type? R/W 0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
9.I [C-0A] -- 0
9.I [D-00] Which heaters are permitted if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut? R/W 0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
9.I [D-01] Contact type of preferential kWh rate PS installation? R/W 0: No
1: Active open
2: Active closed
3: Safety thermostat
9.I [D-02] Which type of DHW pump is installed? R/W 0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. Shunt

9.I [D-03] Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C. R/W 0: No

1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
4: increase 4°C, span 8°C
9.I [D-04] Is a demand PCB connected? R/W 0: No
1: Pwr consmp ctrl
9.I [D-05] Is the pump allowed to run if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut? R/W 0: Forced off
1: As normal
9.I [D-07] Is a solar kit connected? R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [D-08] Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement? R/W 0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
9.I [D-09] Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement? R/W 0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
9.I [D-0A] -- 0
9.I [D-0B] -- 2
9.I [E-00] Which type of unit is installed? R/O 0~5
0: LT split
9.I [E-01] Which type of compressor is installed? R/O 1

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
(*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23* (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. 4P556072-1C - 2021.02
10/11

Field settings table Installer setting at variance with

default value
Breadcrumb Field code Setting name Range, step Date Value
Default value
9.I [E-02] What is the indoor unit software type? R/W (*5) 0: Reversible (*5)
R/O (*6) 1: Heating only (*6)
9.I [E-03] What is the number of backup heater steps? R/O 3: 6V (*1)
4: 9W (*2)
9.I [E-04] Is the power saving function available on the outdoor unit? R/O 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [E-05] Can the system prepare domestic hot water? R/W 0: No (*3)
1: Yes (*4)
9.I [E-06] Is a DHW tank installed in the system? R/O 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [E-07] What kind of DHW tank is installed? R/W 0~6
0: EKHW (*3)
1: Integrated (*4)
5: EKHWP (*3)
9.I [E-08] Power saving function for outdoor unit. R/O 0: disabled
1: Enabled
9.I [E-09] -- 1
9.I [E-0A] -- 0
9.I [E-0B] Is a bi-zone kit installed? 0
9.I [E-0C] -- 0
9.I [E-0D] Is the system filled with glycol ? R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [E-0E] -- 0
9.I [F-00] Pump operation allowed outside range. R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
9.I [F-01] Above which outdoor temperature is cooling allowed? R/W 10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
9.I [F-02] -- 3
9.I [F-03] -- 5
9.I [F-04] -- 0

9.I [F-05] -- 0
9.I [F-09] Pump operation during flow abnormality. R/W 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
9.I [F-0A] -- 0
9.I [F-0B] Close shut-off valve during thermo OFF? R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [F-0C] Close shut-off valve during cooling? R/W 0: No
1: Yes
9.I [F-0D] What is the pump operation mode? R/W 0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request

(*1) *6V_(*2) *9W_

(*3) EAB*_(*4) EAV*_
(*5) *X*_(*6) *H*_
4P556072-1C - 2021.02 (#) Setting is not applicable for this unit. (*7) EAV*18*_(*8) EAV*23*
11/11
 Copyright 2018 Daikin

4P556069-1B 2021.09
Verantwortung für Energie und Umwelt